nera citylink - user manual_2.pdf
TRANSCRIPT
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 1/374
User Manual
CityLink
B4008 Rev. M
© Nera Networks AS
Section I : Equipment Description
Section II : ODU Type I Installation
Section III : ODU Type II Installation
Section IV : ODU Type III Installation
Section V : IDU Installation
Section VI : Preparations for Operation
Section VII : Configuration with NEW-NMS
Section VIII : Fast Ethernet Configuration
Section IX : Troubleshooting
Section X : Appendices
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 2/374
2 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
This section applies only to CE marked equipment
0889WARNING:Use of this equipment requires a separate
license to be applied for by the operator.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (INFORMAL)
English Hereby, Nera Networks AS, declares that this CityLink is in compliance with theessential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Finnish Nera Networks AS
vakuuttaa täten että CityLink tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EYoleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.Dutch Hierbij verklaart Nera Networks AS dat het toestel CityLink in overeenstemming is met
de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EGBij deze verklaart Nera Networks AS dat deze CityLink voldoet aan de essentiële eisenen aan de overige relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999/5/EC.
French Par la présente Nera Networks AS déclare que l’appareil CityLink est conforme auxexigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.Par la présente, Nera Networks AS déclare que ce CityLink est conforme aux exigencesessentielles et aux autres dispositions de la directive 1999/5/CE qui lui sont applicables.
Swedish Härmed intygar Nera Networks AS att denna CityLink står I överensstämmelse med de
väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv1999/5/EG.Danish Undertegnede Nera Networks AS erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr CityLink overhold-
er de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EFGerman Hiermit erklärt Nera Networks AS, dass sich dieser CityLink in Übereinstimmung mit
den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Vorschriften der Rich-tlinie 1999/5/EG befindet“. (BMWi)Hiermit erklärt Nera Networks AS die Übereinstimmung des Gerätes CityLink mit dengrundlegenden Anforderungen und den anderen relevanten Festlegungen der Richtlinie1999/5/EG. (Wien)
Refer to Declaration of Conformity for further details.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 3/374
B4008 Rev. M 3
CityLink
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 4/374
4 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 5/374
B4008 Rev. M 5
CityLink
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 6/374
6 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 7/374
B4008 Rev. M 7
CityLink
WARNING!
DO NOT remove or insert the
Transmitter Unit with DC power on.
Power to the OutDoor Unit (ODU) is carried on
the coaxial cable between the InDoor Unit
(IDU) and the ODU. Before connecting or
removing the cable, ensure that the primary
power to the IDU has been switched off.
WARNING!
This equipment contains components which are
sensitive to "ESD" (Electro Static Discharge).
It is therefore essential that whenever disassem-
bling the equipment and/or handling PC boards,
special precautions to avoid ESD have to be
made.
These precautions include personnel grounding,
grounding of work bench, grounding of tools and
instruments as well as transport and storage in
special antistatic bags and boxes.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
IEC825-2: 1993
CAUTION!
The Optical Interface must only be serviced by
qualified personnel, who are aware of the
hazards involved to repair Laser products.
When handling Laser products the following
precautions must be taken:
Never look directly into an open connector
or optical cable
Before disconnecting an optical cable, the
power should be switched off. If this is not
possible, the cable must be disconnected
from the STM-1 output before it is discon-
nected from the STM-1 input.
When the cable is reconnected it must beconnected to the STM-1 input before it is
connected to the STM-1 output.
CAUTION!Exposure to strong high frequency electromag-
netic fields may cause thermal damage to
personnel. The eye (Cornea and lens) is easily
exposed.
Any unnecessary exposure is undesirable and
should be avoided.
In Radio-Relay communication installations,
orderly setup for normal operation, the general
RF radiation level will be well below the safety
limit.
In the antennas and directly in front of them the
RF intensity normally will exceed the danger
level, within limited portions of space.
Dangerous radiation may be found in the
neighbourhood of open waveguide flanges or
horns where the power is radiated into space.
To avoid dangerous radiation the following
precautions must be taken:
During work within and close to the frontof the antenna; make sure that transmitters
will remain turned off.
Before opening coaxial - or waveguide
connectors carrying RF power, turn off
transmitters.
Consider any incidentally open RF
connector as carrying power, until
otherwise proved. Do not look into coaxial
connectors at closer than reading distance
(30 cm). Do not look into an open wave-guide unless you are absolutely sure that
the power is turned off.
Use of controls or adjustments or perform-
ance of procedures other than those specified
herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 8/374
8 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
List of Revisions
Rev. Date What is changed
C 01-10-05 ODU Type II Installation introducedD 01-12-18 ODU Type III Installation introducedE 02-02-28 Section II; 13 & 15GHz ODU included.
Section IV; Additional info on installation added.Section VII Chapter 5.2 Switch Criteria changed.Section IX: Additional info about connectors and interfacesin Appendix 1
F 02-05-07 Fast Ethernet introduced
Section VII; New subchapter 5.1.5 Reconfiguring a 1+0IDU for use in Hot StandBy ConfigurationG 02-09-18 21x2Mbit/s (CityLink ADM) introduced.
Section VIII: Updated bitmaps in Ch. 16.6 and 16.8.H 02-10-07 Frequency tuning of 13GHz Transceiver included (Section II
Chapter 5.0).I Not usedJ 02-12-19 Section V: New chapter 4.0 Installation of 21x2Mbit/s
Tributary Unit
K 03-05-23 Section II: Chapter 5.0; new frequency (Table II-5)Installation of ODU Type I on Type III suspension introducedSection IV: New subchapter: Mounting the transceiver (without antenna) to a column.Section VIII: Changed bitmaps in Ch. 16.1, 16.2, 16.6 and16.8, Changes in Ch. 8.9.1 and 8.9.2. New commandsincluded in Ch. 3.0 and 4.0.Section X: New alarms in Alarm list
L 03-11-25 DMD IDU introduced. ADM STM-1 and DS3/E3 ext.boards
introduced . New optical interfaces (2NYD5392A and2NYD5368A) introduced.
M 04-10-26 New Version of NEW. (Section VII and VIII) Added info about System Configuration (Section I) Added info about IP Routing (Section VII)Section X: Improved description of Power Connector
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 9/374
B4008 Rev. M 9
CityLink
Table of Contents
SECTION I Equipment Description .................. 21
1.0 Introduction ................................................................. 22
2.0 IDU ................................................................................ 24
2.1 IDU Description ................................................... 242.2 Hot Standby IDU Description............................... 262.3 Line Interface Boards .......................................... 282.4 Service Telephone .............................................. 282.5 21x2Mbit/s Extension Board (option) ................... 302.6 ADM STM-1 (X-Connect) Extension Board (option) 302.6 3xDS3/E3 and DS1 Extension Board (option) .... 322.6 Ethernet Extension Board (CityLink Fast Ethernet) 33
3.0 ODU .............................................................................. 34
3.1 ODU Type I Description ...................................... 343.2 ODU Type II Description ..................................... 363.3 ODU Type III Description ..................................... 38
4.0 Management ................................................................ 40
5.0 System Configurations ............................................... 40
5.1 1+0Configuration ................................................. 415.2 Hot Standby Configuration .................................. 425.3 1+1 Frequency Diversity ..................................... 425.4 Hot Standby Configuration – Dual Antenna ......... 43
5.5 Hot Standby Configuration – Dual Baseband ...... 445.6 2+0 Configuration ................................................ 455.7 Space Diversity ................................................... 465.8 Hybrid Space Diversity ........................................ 465.9 Radio Terminal Configurations............................ 485.10 Radio Repeater Configurations ........................... 485.11 Radio Channel Identification ................................ 48
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 10/374
10 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.0 ODU / Antenna Installation,
Hot Standby Equipment and 2+0 Equipment ........... 70
SECTION II Installation of
ODU Type I and Antenna................. 49
1.0 General ........................................................................ 50
1.1 Packing ............................................................... 501.2 Marking ................................................................ 501.3 Transportation ..................................................... 501.4 Radio Equipment Inventory Check ...................... 511.5 Preparation for Installation ................................... 511.6 Handling & Storage ............................................. 51
2.0 Installation Equipment required................................ 52
2.1 Tools ................................................................... 522.1.1 Tools for Antenna Installation .............................. 522.1.2 Tools for IDU- ODU Cable /Connector Mounting. 522.2 Equipment external to the Radio Equipment ....... 53
3.0 ODU / Antenna Installation, 1+0 Equipment ............. 54
3.1 Installation of 0.6m and 0.45m Antenna ............. 543.1.1 Preparing the Suspension for ODU Mounting ..... 543.1.2 Mounting the Antenna to the Suspension ............ 55
3.1.3 Mounting the Branching Support Bracket ............ 563.1.4 Mounting the Rear Travers .................................. 573.1.5 Mounting the Suspension Support Bracket ......... 573.1.6 Mounting the Bend on the Branching Unit ........... 583.1.7 Installation of the Branching Unit ........................ 593.1.8 Attachment of the Sunshield Support .................. 593.1.9 Installation of the Flexible Waveguide ................ 603.1.10 Installation of the Sunshield ................................ 61
3.1.11 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Column or a Wall ............................................ 62
3.1.12 Mounting the ODU to the Antenna Assembly ..... 653.1.13 Pole Mount ......................................................... 673.2 Installation of 1.2m Antenna ............................... 683.2.1 Assembly of Branching Support Bracket ............ 683.2.3 Installation of Branching Unit,
Sun-shield and Flexible Waveguide .................... 69
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 11/374
B4008 Rev. M 11
CityLink
4.1 0.45m and 0.6m Antenna ................................ 704.1.1 Installation of Hot Standby (HSB) and 2+0
Dual Frequency Single Polarization Equipment . 704.1.1.1 Preparing the Suspension for ODU Mounting
and Mounting the Antenna to the Suspension . 70
4.1.1.2 Mounting the Branching Support Bracket ........ 704.1.1.3 Mounting the Rear Travers, Mounting the
Suspension Support Bracket and Mountingthe Feed on the Branching Unit....................... 71
4.1.1.4 Installation of the HSB Branching Unit............. 714.1.1.5 Installation of the Flexible Waveguide ............. 724.1.1.6 Installation of the Sunshield Support Bracket .. 734.1.1.7 Installation of the Sunshield............................. 73
4.1.1.8 Mounting the Suspension/ODU to aColumn or a Wall ............................................ 74
4.1.1.9 Mounting the ODU to the Antenna Assembly .. 744.1.1.10 Pole Mount ...................................................... 754.1.2 Installation of 2+0 Equipment
(Single Frequency Dual polarity) ..................... 764.1.2.1 Preparing the Suspension for ODU Mounting
and Mounting the Antenna to the Suspension . 764.1.2.2 Mounting the Branching Support Bracket, the
Rear Travers, the Suspension Support Bracketand the Feed on the Branching Units ................ 76
4.1.2.3 Installation of the Branching Units ................... 764.1.2.4 Installation of the Flexible Waveguide ............. 774.1.2.5 Installation of the Sunshield............................. 784.1.2.6 Mounting the Suspension/ODU to a
Column or a Wall ............................................ 794.1.2.7 Mounting the ODU to the Antenna Assembly .. 794.1.2.9 Pole Mount ...................................................... 804.2 1.2m Antenna.................................................. 814.2.1 Assembly of Branching Support Bracket ........ 814.2.2 Installation of Branching Unit, Sun-shield and
Flexible Waveguide ......................................... 824.2.2.1 Hot Standby and
2+0 Dual Frequency Single Polarization ......... 824.2.2.2 2+0 Single Frequency Dual Polarization ......... 83
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 12/374
12 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
5.0 Frequency Tuning at 13GHz &15GHz Transceiver ... 84
6.0 Cable Connections ..................................................... 90
7.0 Antenna Alignment ...................................................... 90
SECTION III Installation of
ODU Type II and Antenna .................. 91
1.0 General ........................................................................ 92
1.1 Packing ............................................................... 921.2 Marking ................................................................ 921.3 Transportation ..................................................... 921.4 Radio Equipment Inventory Check ...................... 931.5 Preparation for Installation ................................... 931.6 Handling & Storage ............................................. 93
2.0 Installation Equipment required ................................ 94
2.1 Tools ................................................................... 942.1.1 Tools for Antenna Installation .............................. 942.1.2 Tools for IDU- ODU Cable /Connector Mounting. 942.2 Equipment external to the Radio Equipment ....... 95
3.0 ODU Installation .......................................................... 96
3.1 Mounting the ODU to the Pole ............................. 963.2 Cable Connections.............................................. 97
4.0 Antenna and Waveguide Installation ........................ 98
4.1 0.6m Antenna ...................................................... 984.2 1.2m Antenna ...................................................... 994.3 2m Antenna ......................................................... 1004.4 2.4m .................................................................... 1014.5 3m ....................................................................... 102
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 13/374
B4008 Rev. M 13
CityLink
SECTION IV Installation of
ODU Type III and Antenna ............ 103
1.0 General ........................................................................ 104
1.1 Packing ............................................................... 1041.2 Marking ................................................................ 1041.3 Transportation ..................................................... 1041.4 Radio Equipment Inventory Check ...................... 1051.5 Preparation for Installation ................................... 1051.6 Handling & Storage ............................................. 105
2.0 Installation Equipment required................................ 1062.1 Tools ................................................................... 1062.1.1 Tools for Antenna Installation and Adjustment .... 1062.1.2 Tools for IDU- ODU Cable /Connector Mounting. 1062.2 Equipment external to the Radio Equipment ....... 107
3.0 ODU / Antenna Installation, 1+0 Equipment ............. 108
3.1 Mounting the Antenna to the Suspension ............ 108
3.2 Mounting the Sunshield ....................................... 1093.3 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna toa Column by using the U-bolts ............................ 110
3.4 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna toa Column by using the Clamps ........................... 111
3.5 Mounting the Transceiver (without Antenna) to a Column ............................ 112
3.6 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Wall ....... 117
3.7 Mounting the ODU to the Antenna Assembly ...... 118
4.0 ODU / Antenna Installation, HSB and 2+0 Equipment 121
4.1 Preparing the Suspension ................................... 1214.2 Mounting the Antenna to the Supension .............. 1224.3 Mounting the Hybrid Frame to the Antenna ......... 1234.3 Mounting the CityLink III ODUs to
the Antenna Assembly ........................................ 125
4.4 Mounting the Transceiver (without Antenna) to the Column ......................... 126
4.5 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Wall ....... 126
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 14/374
14 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
5.0 Cable Connections ..................................................... 127
6.0 Antenna Alignment ...................................................... 128
6.1 Azimuth and Elevation Adjustment...................... 1286.2 Coarse adjustment.............................................. 128
6.3 Fine adjustment .................................................. 1286.4 Final Control ........................................................ 1296.5 Polarisation alignment ......................................... 129
SECTION V IDU Installation............................... 131
1.0 General ........................................................................ 1321.1 Packing ............................................................... 1321.2 Marking ................................................................ 1321.3 Transportation ..................................................... 1321.4 Radio Equipment Inventory Check ...................... 1331.5 Preparation for Installation................................... 1331.6 Handling & Storage ............................................. 133
2.0 IDU Installation ............................................................ 1342.1. Mounting the IDU in an ANSI (19") or an ETSI Rack ... 1342.2 Cable Installation ................................................. 135
3.0 Hot Standby IDU Installation ...................................... 136
3.1 Mounting the Hot Standby IDUs in a Rack........... 1363.2 Interconnections in a Hot Standby System ......... 137
4.0 Installation of Optional Extension Boards ............... 138
5.0 IDU/ODU Cable Installation........................................ 141
6.0 Change of Fan-Cassette ............................................ 146
SECTION VI Preparations for Operation ........ 147
1.0 General ........................................................................ 148
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 15/374
B4008 Rev. M 15
CityLink
1.1 Equipment required ............................................. 1481.2 Connections ........................................................ 148
2.0 Power on ...................................................................... 148
2.1 NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator Startup and
connecting to Network Elements ........................ 1492.1.1 Starting NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator with
Serial Connection (RS-232/ LCT). ...................... 1492.1.2 Starting NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator with
TCP/IP Connection. ............................................ 1502.2 Initial configuration ............................................... 150
SECTION VII Configuration by NEW Configurator 151
1.0 General ........................................................................ 152
2.0 Element Node.............................................................. 154
2.1 Element Id ........................................................... 1542.2 Available Functions ............................................. 156
2.3 Notifications......................................................... 1572.4 NE Clock Page .................................................... 1592.5 Software Download ............................................. 1602.6 Software Versions ............................................... 161
3.0 Transmission Node..................................................... 163
3.1 Section Termination ............................................ 1633.1.1 Section Termination, SW-version < R2A00 ........ 163
3.1.2 Section Termination, SW-version ³ R2A00 ......... 1643.1.3 SSM - Synchronization Status Message ............. 1723.2 Alarm Indication Signal Insert .............................. 1733.3 Path Trace .......................................................... 176
4.0 Equipment Node ......................................................... 178
4.1 Network Routing.................................................. 1784.2 IP Routing............................................................ 181
4.2.1 General Settings ................................................. 1824.2.2 Active Routes ...................................................... 184
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 16/374
16 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.2.3 Static Routes ...................................................... 1854.2.4 RIP Interfaces ..................................................... 1864.2.5 OSPF Interfaces ................................................. 1874.2.6 OSPF Areas........................................................ 1884.3 Communication Ports ......................................... 189
4.3.1 DCC (Data Communication Channel) ................ 1894.3.2 NI (Network Interface) .......................................... 1914.3.3 LCT ..................................................................... 1934.3.4 Ethernet .............................................................. 1944.3.5 IP Settings ........................................................... 1954.3.6 IP Tunneling ........................................................ 1964.3.7 OSI TP4 Tunneling .............................................. 1974.4 Looping ............................................................... 198
4.4.1 Main Looping ....................................................... 1984.4.2 64 Kbit/s Looping ................................................ 2004.4.3 2 Mbit/s Wayside Looping ................................... 2024.4.4 21x2Mbit/s Looping.............................................. 2054.4.5 DS3/E3 Looping .................................................. 2074.5 In Door Unit (IDU) ................................................ 2104.5.1 IDU Production Data ........................................... 2104.5.2 64 kbit/s Channels .............................................. 2114.5.3 2 Mbit/s Wayside Channel .................................. 2134.5.4 SOH X-Connect .................................................. 2154.5.5 Error Pulse Output .............................................. 2164.5.6 Auxiliary Output Configuration ............................. 2174.5.7 Diagnose ............................................................. 2194.5.8 Self Test .............................................................. 2204.5.9 BER Thresholds ................................................. 2204.5.10OSI Configuration ................................................ 2224.5.11Laser Control ...................................................... 2274.5.12IDU Replace Unit Wizard .................................... 2294.6 Out Door Unit (ODU)........................................... 2304.6.1 Type I ODU ......................................................... 2304.6.2 Type II ODU......................................................... 2354.6.3 Type III ODU........................................................ 2474.6.4 Antenna Data ...................................................... 2524.6.5 ODU Replace Unit Wizard .................................. 253
5.0 CityLink ADM ............................................................... 254
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 17/374
B4008 Rev. M 17
CityLink
5.1 21x2 Mbit/s Extension Board ............................... 2545.1.1 Drop or Continue ................................................. 2545.1.2 PRBS Test - Check ............................................ 2585.1.3 PRBS Test - Generators ..................................... 2605.1.4 Production Data - 21x2Mbit/s Extension board ... 262
5.2 DS3/E3 Extension Board .................................... 2635.2.1 DS3/E3 Configuration ......................................... 2635.2.2 DS3/E3 Frame Structure Configuration .............. 2655.3 ADM STM-1 Extension Board (X-Connect) ......... 2675.3.1 X-Connect Frame Structure Configuration.......... 2675.3.2 X-Connect Configuration ..................................... 268
6.0 Hot Standby ................................................................. 270
6.1 General ............................................................... 2706.1.1 Functionality ........................................................ 2706.1.2 Element ID .......................................................... 2716.1.2 Looping Configuration ......................................... 2736.1.3 Hot Standby Configuration .................................. 2756.1.4 Hot Standby Switching Criteria ............................ 2766.1.4 Reconfiguring a Hot Standby IDU for
use in 1+0 Configuration ..................................... 2786.1.5 Reconfiguring a 1+0 IDU for
use in Hot StandBy Configuration ...................... 278
SECTION VIII CityLink Fast Ethernet Configuration 279
Hyperterminal & Telnet .................................................... 280
1.0 Hyperterminal & Telnet Commands .......................... 280
2.0 How to get this link alive............................................ 281
2.1 How to get this link alive, parameters .................. 2812.2 Testing ................................................................ 281
3.0 Top Level Commands ................................................ 282
3.1 Top Level Commands, Example ......................... 283
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 18/374
18 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.0 Submenu Commands.................................................. 284
4.1 EEB Submenu .................................................... 2844.2 Baseband Submenu ........................................... 2854.3 Modem Submenu (part of IDU) ........................... 2864.4 Radio Submenu (part of ODU)............................ 287
4.4.1 Radio Status, Example ....................................... 2884.4.2 Radio Commands, Example of Error Message .. 2884.5 SU Submenu (part of IDU) .................................. 2894.6 Security Submenu .............................................. 2894.7 Performance Submenu....................................... 2904.8 Configuration Submenu ...................................... 2904.8.1 Management Settings ......................................... 2914.9 Test & Fault Submenu ........................................ 291
4.10 Q1module Submenu ........................................... 292
5.0 Software Upgrade Procedure for
the CityLink Fast Ethernet Device ............................ 293
5.1 How to download a file to the IDU:....................... 2945.1.1 Using the Console FTP Client ............................. 2945.1.2 Using the Internet Explorer .................................. 2955.2 How to download a file to the ODU ..................... 296
NEW Network Management System ............................... 297
6.0 Start NEW-NMS & Connect........................................ 297
7.0 Network Element Configuration ................................ 300
8.0 Element Node.............................................................. 3028.1 Element Id ........................................................... 3028.2 NE Clock ............................................................. 3038.3 Software Versions ............................................... 3048.4 Production Data .................................................. 3058.5 SNMP Agent(s) Settings ..................................... 3068.6 Trap Table ........................................................... 3088.7 MIB II - System Group ......................................... 309
8.8 MIB-II SNMP Group.............................................. 3118.9 Looping ............................................................... 3128.9.1 Main Traffic Loops ............................................... 313
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 19/374
B4008 Rev. M 19
CityLink
8.9.2 Wayside Loops ................................................... 3158.9.3 64 kbit/s Loops .................................................... 316
9.0 In Door Unit (IDU) ....................................................... 317
9.1 64 kbit/s Channels .............................................. 317
9.2 Ethernet Extension Board ................................... 3179.2.1 Ethernet Ports ..................................................... 3189.2.2 2 Mbit/s Ports ...................................................... 3199.3 Wayside Channel ................................................ 3209.4 Auxiliary Output ................................................... 3219.5 BER Thresholds ................................................. 3239.6 Laser Control ...................................................... 325
10.0 Out Door Unit (ODU) .................................................. 327
10.1 Antenna Data ...................................................... 32710.2 Power Settings.................................................... 32810.3 Frequency Settings ............................................. 330
11.0 Performance ................................................................ 332
11.1 G826 Performance.............................................. 33211.2 Port Performance ............................................... 33411.3 Repeater Performance ....................................... 335
12.0 Fault .............................................................................. 336
12.1 NE Alarm Log ...................................................... 336
13.0 Security ........................................................................ 337
13.1 Security Log ........................................................ 337
SNMP & MIB Description ................................................. 338
14.0 General ........................................................................ 338
15.0 Supported MIB’s ......................................................... 338
16.0 MIB Overview ............................................................. 339
16.1 Unit ...................................................................... 34016.2 IDU ...................................................................... 341
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 20/374
20 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
16.3 ODU .................................................................... 34216.4 Test Manager ...................................................... 34316.5 Performance Manager ........................................ 34416.6 Fault Manager ..................................................... 34516.7 Analogue Value ................................................... 346
16.8 Security Manager ................................................ 346
SECTION IX Troubleshooting ......................... 347
1.0 General ........................................................................ 348
2.0 Description of Alarm LEDs ......................................... 3482.1 IDU Alarm LEDs.................................................. 3482.2 HSB-IDU Alarm LEDs and Switch Indicators ..... 3482.3 LEDs on Line Interface Plug-in Boards ............... 349
3.0 Troubleshooting by NEW-NMS Configurator .......... 349
3.1 Introduction.......................................................... 3493.2 Information Acquisition ........................................ 349
3.2.1 Polling ................................................................. 3493.2.2 Event Notification ................................................ 3503.3 Alarm Presentation.............................................. 3503.4 Visual Alarm Notification...................................... 3513.4.1 Alarms on a Tree node/leaf in the Explorer view . 3513.4.2 Alarms on a Node symbol in the Map view .......... 3523.4.3 Viewing Alarms in the Current Alarms View ........ 353
SECTION X Appendices................................... 355
Appendix I: IDU / HSB-IDU Interface Description.................. 356
Appendix II: ODU Interface Description ................................. 370
Appendix III: Alarm List & Alarm Description.......................... 371
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 21/374
B4008 Rev. M 21
Equipment Description
Equipment
Description
SECTION I
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 22/374
22 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
1.0 IntroductionCityLink is a super compact SDH radio-relay transmission system with STM-
1 capacity. The equipment is split mounted with one single coaxial cable
between the InDoor Unit (IDU) and the OutDoor Unit (ODU). The ODU and
antenna can be located up to 300 meter apart from the IDU. The equipmentis available in 1+0 (single), 2+0 or 1+1 hot standby configurations. Various
line and tributary interface options are available as plug-in modules. The
equipment is also prepared for 21x2Mbit/s terminal multiplexer functionality.
The network applications foreseen for this equipment are mainly for in-
creased connectivity in urban area as well as closure of fiber optic rings.
Additionally, in the fixed part of mobile networks, this equipment is
suitable.
Built-in supervision enables easy installation and configuration, and sys-
tem status and availability data may be recorded. Advanced management
with standardized use of the Embedded Control Channel (ECC) allows for
easy access to this equipment. Broadband RF design enables easy channel
selection.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 23/374
B4008 Rev. M 23
Equipment Description
Key features• Easy installation
• Frequency agility
• 155 Mb/s Line interface plug-ins available:
Unbalanced 75Ω coaxial
Balanced, Category 5 UTP, 100ΩSingle Mode fiber optic
Multi Mode fiber optic
• SW managed configuration of 32, 64 and 128 TCM modulation
• SW managed configuration of STM-0 or STM-1 capacity
• 21x2Mbits/s terminal multiplexer option
• 3xDS3/E3 and DS1 option
• ADM STM-1 option (STM-1 cross-connect)
• Fast ethernet radio option
• 64kbit/s and 2Mbit/s insert channels• Service Channel / Engineering Orderwire
• Line extensions (2) for Service Channel
• Built-in diagnostics with local and remote loopback
• Available Configurations:
1+0 (Unprotected) (STM-1 & STM-0)
1+1 (Hot Standby) (STM-1 & STM-0)
2+0 Dual frequency, Single Polarisation (DF-SP) (2xSTM-1 & STM-0)
2+0 Single frequency, Dual Polarisation (SF-DP) (2xSTM-1 & STM-0)
• High system gain
• Automatic/Manual Transmitter Power Control (ATPC/MTPC)
• Standardized use of the ECC
• Embedded SNMP (Option)
• 14, 28, 50 & 55 (56) MHz channel arrangements
• 2MHz synchronization interfaces (SETS)
• Interface for local and subnetwork management (LAN or RS-232)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 24/374
24 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
2.0 IDU
2.1 IDU Description
Figures X-1 shows the IDU front layout. All the connectors are located on
the front for easy operation. In addition to the line interface, 2Mbit/s
wayside and 64kbit/s data channels are available. As options, a 21x2 Mbit/
s terminal multiplexer, ADM STM-1 (X-Connect) or DS3/E3 can be config-
ured by adding a second circuit board. The IDU is equipped with an
integrated supervisory system for local and remote configuration and
control. The supervisory system communicates with the ODU by use of an
FSK modulated channel on the coaxial cable. The same coaxial cable also
carries power to the ODU. For configuration and management purposes the
IDU is equipped with two LCT interfaces for connection to the PC, one with
RS-232 interface and one LAN TP interface. In addition NI interfaces for
connection to other IDUs or other Nera equipment are provided. A SETS
function is incorporated into the unit, conforming to ITU-T rec. G.823 with
balanced 120Ω interface. The IDU has a connector for alarm input/output
functionality (ALM/AUX). Alarm and warning LEDs are located on right
hand side of front. Located close to the power connector is a power indicating
LED.
Figure I-1 shows a block schematic view of the IDU with various optional line
interface plug-in boards and also a 21x2 Mbit/s Extension Board. In radiotransmit direction, the 155 Mb/s input signal from the line interface board is
fed to the “SORP” ASIC. It performs all the SOH processing and radio
scrambling. Then, the TX FPGA encodes the signal by use of a convolution
code and an optional Reed Solomom code. The signal is then mapped into
a “32TCM”, “64TCM” or “128TCM” constellation, as required. It also
performs the necessary pulse shaping by use of a digital FIR-filter. The signal
is then digitally I-Q modulated, and the 350MHz IF signal is fed to the ODU
interface and applied to the IF coaxial connector. In receive direction the
140MHz IF from the ODU will interface the IDU on the same connector. Thenecessary cable equalizing functions are provided in the ODU interface and
the equalized IF is presented to the coherent demodulator. From the demod-
ulator the signal is fed to the RX FPGA, which perform slope equalization and
receive filtering. Then the “ATDEC” ASIC, performs Trellis decoding, by use
of soft decision and the “Viterbi” algorithm for error correction. The optional
Reed Solomon decoding is performed in the RX FPGA. The decoded signal
is then fed to the SORP ASIC for radio descrambling and SOH processing,
and is finally fed to the line interface board.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 25/374
B4008 Rev. M 25
Equipment Description
Figure I-1 Block schematic view of the IDU
F i l e : I D U - H R Q I . D S F
L A N ( 1 0 B A S E - T )
2 x N I
4 8 V D C
2 M b / s W A Y S I D E
M O D E M T R A N S C E I V E R
C O M M U N I C A T I O N
D C C
R E G U L A T E D
O U T P U T S
A S I C
D C / D C
T R I B U T A R Y
I N T E R F A C E
B L O C K
N O . 2
F P G A
2 1 x 2 M b / s L I N E I N T F C . / A D D - D R O P E X T E N S I O N B D .
M A I N B D .
T X :
F P G A
M A P P E R
E N C O D E R
F I L T E R
" S O R P "
S T M - 1
O V E R H E A D
A N D
R A D I O
P R O C E S S O R
2 M H z S Y N C
O D U
2 x 6 4 K b / s
A L A R M S
L C T
V 1 1 / G . 7 0 3
I N T E R F A C E
I N T E R P O L A T I O N
M O D U L A T I O N
U P C O N V E R S I O N
O D U
I N T E R F A C E
1 2 1
2 1 x 2 M b / s
G . 7 0 3
G . 7 0 3
A L M / A U X
I N T F C .
1 5 5 M b / s
L I N E
I N T E R F A C E
O p t i c a l M M F ~ 2 K m
o r E l e c t r . C A T 5 U T P
o r E l e c t r . G . 7 0 3
T R I B U T A R Y
D A T A
M A P P E R
N O . 1
T R I B U T A R Y
D A T A
M A P P E R
N O . 1
A S I C ' s
S U P E R -
V I S O R Y
S Y S T E M
F I F O B U S
A S I C
" A T D E C "
T R E L L I S
D E C O D E R
H S B I D U I N T F C .
S V C E
P H O N E
I N T
E R F A C E
P H O N E
2 x P H O N E E X T .
" E 1 "
" H 2 "
S Y N C .
I N T E R F A C E
D / A C O N V E R S I O N
D O W N C O N V E R S I O N
A / D C O N V E R S I O N
R X :
F P G A
C A R R I E R R E C .
D E M A P P E R
C L O C K R E C .
D E C O D E R
O S C .
S O U R C E
O
S C .
S O
U R C E
4 x 3 x
8 7 . 5 M H z
9 3 . 3 M H z
2 x
o r O p t i c a l S M F ~ 4 0 K m
o r O p t i c a l S M F ~ 1 5 K m
o r O p t i c a l S M F ~ 8 0 K m
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 26/374
26 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
2.2 Hot Standby IDU Description
Figure X-2 shows the HSB IDU front layout. The connectors on the front
are identical to the ones used on the IDU and is therefore not further
described here. Additionally, a second power connector is added for
power redundancy enabling separate battery courses. Figure I-2 shows a
block schematic view of the IDU with various optional line interface plug-in boards. Interconnection of data and control signals between IDUs (A and
B) and HSB IDU is by means of a connector and special split cable. This
cable is part of the HSB cable kit. In a 1+1 HSB system, all the customer
interfaces are towards the HSB IDU. These signals are disabled on the IDU
in such a configuration. The same alarm and warning LEDs used on IDU is
also used here. Additionally, a second power indicating LED is located
close to the redundant power connector. Also, an array of four LEDs,
located on the right hand side in close proximity to the alarm/warning
LEDs, indicates switching status in transmit and receive direction.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 27/374
B4008 Rev. M 27
Equipment Description
Figure I-2 Block schematic view of the HSB IDU
(shown here with DS3/E3 Extension Board)
File: HSBIDU-HRQE.DRW
LAN (10BASE-T)
2 x NI
48V DC
2Mb/s WAYSIDEDCC
REGULATEDOUTPUTS
ASIC
DC / DC
TRIBUTARYINTERFACE
BLOCK
FPGA
3xE3/DS3 EXTENSION BD.
MAIN BD HSB IDU.
"SORP"
SDH
OVERHEAD ANDRADIO
PROCESSOR
SYNC.2MHz SYNC
2 x 64 Kb/s
ALARMS
LCT
V11/G.703
INTERFACE
3x34/45 Mb/s
G.703INTERFACE
ALM/AUXINTFC.
155 Mb/s
LINEINTERFACE
TRIBUTARYDATA
MAPPERNO. 1
TRIBUTARYDATA
MAPPERNO. 1
ASIC's
SUPER-VISORYSYSTEM
FIFO BUS
IDU A INTFC. (R)
SVCEPHONE
INTERFACE
PHONE
2 x PHONE EXT.
"E1"
"H1"
IDU B INTFC. (P)
Optical MMF ~2Km
or Electr. CAT5 UTPor Electr. G.703
or Optical SMF ~40Km
or Optical SMF ~15Km
or Optical SMF ~80Km
G.703
1.5 Mb/s WAYSIDE PHY
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 28/374
28 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
2.3 Line Interface Boards
Six different versions of 155 Mb/s line interface boards are presently
available as plug-in modules. These are:
• Electrical, 75Ω unbalanced interface bd. according to
ITU-T rec. G.703.• CAT-5 UTP electrical interface bd. according to
ATM Forum rec. af-phy-0015.000.
• Multimode Fiber optical interface bd. according to
ANSI rec. T1.646 and T1.105.06 type “SR-0”.
• Singelmode Fiber optical interface bd. according to
ITU-T rec. G.957, type “S-1.1”.
• Singelmode Fiber optical interface bd. according to
ITU-T rec. G.957, type “L-1.1”.
• Singelmode Fiber optical interface bd. according toITU-T rec. G.957, type “L-1.2”.
In a 1+1 HSB system, the line interface board will only be used on the HSB
IDU. All the interface boards have an input signal indicating LED.
2.4 Service Telephone
A service telephone with collective call is provided in both the IDU and
HSB IDU. In a 1+1 HSB system, the customer interface connection must be towards the HSB IDU.
External connection to two other similar equipment can take place via two
RJ-45 ports on the front. Refer to Appendix I for connector pin-out and
description and Figure I-3 for circuit diagram of the service channel
interface. The balanced interfaces have a nominal level of -6dBm and
600Ω impedance. Connect OUT to INP and vice versa.
Service channel signalling is based on collective call. The DTMF-star
sequence is used as collective call to interface with other Nera equipment.
If other equipment connected have a different calling system than DTMF-
star, they may use CALL INP/CALL OUT. Station ground connected to
CALL INP will start transmission of DTMF-star as well as activating a
buzzer. A detected DTMF-star will activate the CALL OUT by opening an
optocoupler to station ground.
For Nera PDH-radio equipped with Service Board 2NF467A, CALL INP
has to be connected to CALL OUT and vice versa.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 29/374
B4008 Rev. M 29
Equipment Description
Figure I-3 “Service Channel CALL" Circuit Diagram
CALL_OUT/CTRL_OUT
CALL_INP/CTRL_INP
2 B A S 1 6
3 1
2110k
1 BSR19APC3Q66Q1
2BYM12232
1k2 1
16 1
3
15 2BSR19A1
1 3 14
1kPC3Q66Q
24 13
-48V
21 +3.3V10k
CTRLINPCALLINP/
212 CTRLOUT10kCALLOUT/
+5V
A control signal can be transferred over the radio hop. Station ground
connected to CTRL INP will set a signalling bit which is detected on the
other side and activates CTRL OUT by opening an optocoupler to station
ground. See Figure I-3. The control signal is used to control PABX-
adapters and to switch off loudspeakers on Nera service boards with
selective call (e.g. 2NF4688, 2NF533B and 2KNF232A). The controlsignal is transferred only if SOH-byte “E1”, “E2” or “F1” is used for
transmission of service channel.
For setup by NEW, refer to Section VII.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 30/374
30 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
2.5 21x2Mbit/s Extension Board (option)
In Figure I-4, a block schematic depiction of a 21x2Mbit/s Extension Board
function are given. This function enables twenty-one 2Mbit/s channels to
be multiplexed/demultiplexed, enabling a terminal multiplex function. It is
possible to configure the unit to drop a certain number of 2Mbit/s channels
while delivering the rest as a part of the STM-1 payload in a “drop-and-continue” configuration. In a standard terminal multiplexer configuration,
the plug-in line interface board is omitted. The 2Mbit/s channels conform to
ITU-T rec. G.703, balanced 120Ω. Also provided on the same circuit board
is the option of using one of the 2Mbit/s channels as SETS reference clock
input/output, according to ITU-T rec. G.823.
In a 1+1 HSB system, this interface board will be mounted in the HSB IDU.
In a 1+0 system it will be included in the IDU.
TRIBUTARYINTERFACE
BLOCKNO. 1
ASIC
21x2 Mb/s LINE INTFC./ADD-DROP EXTENSION BD.
1
21
21x2 Mb/sG.703
TRIBUTARYDATA
MAPPERNO. 1
TRIBUTARYDATA
MAPPERNO. 1
ASIC's
To/fromtheIDU'sSDHOverheadandRadio
Processor (SORP)
Figure I-4 Block schematic view of the 21x2Mbit/s Extension Board
2.6 ADM STM-1 (X-Connect) Extension Board (option)
The Extension Bd. ADM STM-1, which is a part of the Indoor unit in the NERA CityLink, is an optional ITU-T standard STM-1 interface implemented
for 155 Mbit/s signal entry and exit in a ring topology. The STM-1 entry signal
into the ring is split and transmitted to line and radio side in parallel. Signals
exiting the ring are received from line and radio side. These are up to 63xVC-
12s from either side and they are protected, i.e. they shall be switched
individually if a break somewhere in the ring occurs. Also, the system will
handle any allowed combination of VC-3s and VC-12s.
In Figure I-5, a block schematic of the STM-1 Extension Board functions isshown. The STM-1Extension Board will interface one STM-1 line signal in
Tx- and Rx-direction. The STM-1 interface is interchangeable in the following
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 31/374
B4008 Rev. M 31
Equipment Description
Figure I-5 Block schematic view of the ADM STM-1 Extension Board
TDM1RADIO
TDM1LINE
TDM1LINE
EXTENSIONBOARD
PLD14FPGA
SORPEXT BOARD
LINEINTERFACE
CARD
IDU CONN
way: In a slot in the STM-1Extension Board, a line interface board is inserted.
Presently one type of board is implemented: The plug-in board compliant
with ITU-T G.703 CMI encoded 155 Mbit/s customer interface; 2LN24C. A
green LED, located on the front of the board indicates presence of an input
signal. The line interface board is mounted on the extension board prior to
this being mounted within the IDU cabinet. This means that the line interface board will not be used as a plug-in type board in this application.
SOH processing and line scrambling /descrambling on the STM-1 interface
are performed by the SORP ASIC. The TDM1 ASICs perform insertion,
extraction, signal processing and cross-connection of data in the payload
of the STM-1 frame and also make error and performance measurements on
VC-3 and error measurements on VC-12. The PLD14 FPGA makes perform-
ance measurements on VC-12s embedded in the STM-1 datastreams from
two TDM1 ASICs. The measurement results are used to choose individualVC-12s from the two datastreams in TDM1 ASIC no.1 and TDM1 ASIC no.2.
The selection is done by the SU in TDM1 ASIC no. 3. See Figure I-5.
TDM1 ASIC no 1—— →
PLD14 FPGA——————— →
TDM1 ASIC no 3 ———————— →
TDM1 ASIC no 2 ————————-→
SORP ASIC no 2 ————————— →
Line Interface Board ———————-→
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 32/374
32 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
2.6 3xDS3/E3 and DS1 Extension Board (option)
DS3 is a 45Mbit/s PDH standard used for the North American marked, E3 is
34Mb/s PDH standard used for the European marked and the DS1 is a
1.5Mbit/s PDH standard used for the North American marked. The 3xDS3/
E3 and DS1 Ext. Bd., which is a part of the Indoor unit in the NERA CityLink,
will perform add-drop of 3xDS3/E3 PDH channels to-from a STM-1 frame. Inadditional it will perform insertion and extraction of 1.5 Mbit/s wayside (DS1/
T1).
InFigure I-6, a block schematic of the 3xDS3/E3 and DS1 Ext. Bd. functions
are shown. The 3xDS3/E3 and DS1 Ext. Bd. will interface three DS3/E3 and
one DS1 line signal in Tx- and Rx-direction. The line interface circuit includes;
cable equalizer, line coding and pulse shaping functions. This is performed
by two Line Interface Unites (LIU), one for DS3/E3 an one for DS1. SOH
overhead and radio processor is located oh the motherboard in the IDU.
The PLD15 FPGA maps the 3xDS3/E3 into three VC3s, then into a VC4 and
then into a STM-1 signal and de-maps in the opposite direction. The STM-
1 signal is locked to a 2.048 MHz input (SETS) coming from the motherboard.
The TDM1 ASIC performs insertion, extraction and cross-connection of
data in the payload of the STM-1 frame. Together, the two TDM1s and PLD15
implement the core of a DS3/E3 add-drop multiplexer. The 1.5 Mbit/s
Wayside (DS1/T1) function is implemented in PLD15 and is independent of
the TDM1 ASICs.
Figure I-6 Block schematic view of the 3xDS3/E3 Extension Board
3xDS3/E3 and T1 EXT. BOARD
48 V
+3.3 V
+1.5 V
TDM1
No. 1
LINE
TDM1
No. 2
RADIO
3xDS3/E3
DC/DC
T1 LIU
PLD15
IDU CONNECTOR
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 33/374
B4008 Rev. M 33
Equipment Description
2.6 Ethernet Extension Board (CityLink Fast Ethernet)
In Figure I-7, a block schematic description of an Ethernet Extension Board
(EEB) is given. This function enables 4 separate Ethernet channels 10BASE-
T/100BASE-TX and 4 separate 2Mbit channels conforming to ITU-T rec.
G.703. The EEB will treat all 8 channels separately, meaning that all data
entering on one channel will leave on the same channel on the other side of the radio hop. All channels are full duplex. The four Ethernet and four 2Mbit/
s channels shares the STM-1 data capacity. The 2Mbit channels, if enabled,
will always be guaranteed full bandwidth. The 4 Ethernet channels can be
configured to either equally share the STM-1 data frame, or one channel can
be given priority. The EEB has a limited on board Ethernet package buffer
capacity. This gives the ability to handle short time 100Mbit/s bursts on all
four channels without package loss. Also the EEB supports flow control,
making it possible to configure a 400Mbit full duplex network without
package loss, even though the radio hop is limited to STM-1 data rate.
To from IDU
main board
4x RJ45
Ethernet
4x RJ45
2Mbit
Ethernet to/fromSTM1 and 2Mbit
mapper/demapper
Ethernet
Interface
2/1.5Mbit
Interface
Figure I-7 Block schematic view of the Ethernet Extension Board
2 Mbit/s
Interface
Ethernet to/from
STM1 and 2Mbit/s
mapper/demapper
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 34/374
34 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
3.0 ODU
3.1 ODU Type I Description
The ODU Type I is an assembly of branching unit and transceiver unit
mounted behind the antenna or on a mounting frame on a pole/column. The
ODU is connected to the IDU with a single coaxial cable. The coaxial cable provides Tx-IF, Rx-IF, signalling and power supply. For flexibility and easy
installation, the coaxial cable is con-
nected to the transceiver through the
branching unit. The transceiver is at-
tached to the branching with a snap on
system. With this solution, the coaxial
cable may remain connected during
transceiver replacement. In 1+0 con-
figuration the branching unit is for a
single transceiver and in Hot Standby
configurations the branching is for dual
transceivers. The ODU and the antenna
are assembled very closely together
making it very compact. Nevertheless
the antenna can be separated from the
ODU by use of a flexible waveguide.
The branching unit contains RF channel filters, circulators and overvoltage
protection. The Hot Standby branching contains in addition a RF switch for
transmit direction and a RF power splitter for the receive direction.
The transceiver unit contains a microwave Tx/Rx module, a synthesised
local oscillator and a transceiver main board, all in a waterproof housing.
The transceiver is based on dual frequency conversion in the transmitter
and triple conversion in the receiver. This radio architecture with high IF
frequencies allows for use of wide band branching filters while stillmaintaining excellent spectrum purity in transmitter and high selectivity
in receiver. The use of wide band branching filters allows for a wide choice
of remote channel frequency selection without changing hardware.
The microwave module is an integrated multi-chip module with GaAs
HEMT MMICs for Power Amplifier and Low Noise Amplifier. The
necessary LO frequencies for the frequency converters are generated in
a low phase noise synthesiser unit. The channel frequency is remotely
programmed from the indoor unit. Transmit/receive IF-chain, control-
circuits, signalling and power supply are integrated on the transceiver main
board.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 35/374
B4008 Rev. M 35
Equipment Description
Figure I-8 Block schematic view of the ODU Type I, 18GHz, in 1+0 configuration
T R A N S C E I V E R
U N I T
1 4 0 M H z
3 5 0 M H z
I F I N / O U T
M / T C O M
D C P W R
B R A N C H I N G
U N I T
T
R A N S C E I V E R M A I N B O A R D
M I C R O W A V E M O D U L E
X N
A N T E N N A
U N I T
P W R
S Y N T H E S
I Z E R
D U P L E X
F R E Q
7 G H z
F I X E D
2 1 0 M H z
P R E -
D I S T
2 G H z
S Y N T H
U H F L O
C A B .
E Q .
I F I N / O U T
U H F L O
C T R
L / M / T C O M / P O W E R
I F L O O P
3 5 0 M H z
U H F
I F
3 5 0 M H z
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 36/374
36 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
3.2 ODU Type II Description
The Type II of the ODU consists of a weatherproof
box containing the branching system. The ODU
box is mounted on a pole/column behind the anten-
na. The Transceiver unit is a plug-in unit mounted in
the box. In 1+0 configuration the ODU box con-tains a 1+0 branching unit for a single transceiver
and in Hot Standby configurations the ODU box
contains a Hot Standby branching unit and dual
transceivers. The branching unit contains RF chan-
nel filters and the diplexer. The Hot Standby branch-
ing contains in addition an RF switch for transmit
direction and an RF power splitter for the receive
direction.
The transceiver unit contains 7 modules/sub-units;
a microwave transmitter module, a receiver mod-
ule, 3 local oscillators, an IF &controller board and a detector board. The
transceiver is connected to the modem/IDU with a single coaxial cable that
carries Tx-IF, Rx-IF and signalling (MTcom). Power is supplied through
a separate connector (D-sub), and for the split mount case this power is
separated from the coaxial cable in the ODU container (box).
The transceiver utilises a single conversion scheme in the transmitter and
a dual conversion in the receiver. In order to obtain an optimum spectrum
mask, the transmitter chain contains predistortion circuitry at IF before
the microwave upconverter and power amplifier. Narrow channel filters in
the branching unit further reduces the spectrum mask. The second convert-
er in the receive chain allows for an IF loop-back facility for diagnostics
purposes. LO frequencies for the microwave frequency converters are
generated in synthesised DROs. The oscillators are by nature fixed in
frequency, i.e. they can only be remotely programmed within a narrowrange. When necessary, the oscillators can be adjusted within a range of
approx. 200 MHz with a mechanical screw (see Section VII Chapter
4.5.2.3 for guidance). Power supply, transmit/receive IF-chain, signalling
and controller (DSP) for the transceiver are integrated on the IF &control-
ler board.
The branching unit contains narrow RF channel filters and circulators.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 37/374
B4008 Rev. M 37
Equipment Description
M u l t i -
p l e x e r
A G C & C a b l e
e q u a l i z e r
P r e d i s t o
r t i o n &
A G C
S S
B
U p c o n
v e r t e r
P o w e r
A m p l i f i e r
L O , I M D m x r
L o w N o i s e
A m p l i f i e r
I M R M i x e r
F L T R &
A G C
D S
B
M i x e r
F L T R &
A G C
M T -
C o m .
C T R L
I M D D e t .
L O D e t .
D C / D C
T x I F
3 5 0 M H z
R x I F
1 4 0 M H z
M T c
o m 4
8 V
3 5 0 M H z
1 4 0 M H z
T x -
S y n t .
R x -
S y n t .
I F -
S
y n t .
3 5 0 M H z
S y n t h e s i z e r U n i t
X M T R M o d u
l e
R C V R
M o d u l e
1 4 0 M H z
2 1 0 M H z
T x L O
R x L O
3 5 0 M H z
I F l o o p
I F & C T R L B d .
R F o u t
R F i n
Figure I-9 Block schematic view of the ODU Type II, 7GHz, in 1+0 configuration
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 38/374
38 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
3.3 ODU Type III Description
Type III of the ODU consists of a single
ODU (in 1+0 configuration) mounted
behind the antenna and attached to the
antenna by means of four snap-on
clamps. The ODU is connected to theIDU via a single coaxial cable which
carries transmitter IF, receive IF and
control and monitoring signals, as well
as DC power. In 2+0 and 1+1 hot stand-
by configurations both ODUs are at-
tached by the same snap-on clamps to a
branching hybrid. This hybrid can ei-
ther be bolted directly to the antenna or
via a short length of flexible waveguide.The branching hybrid contains an RF
splitter and combiner.
The ODU consists of a weatherproof housing containing a microwave
transmit/receive module, a synthesised local oscillator module and an IF
and control transceiver main board. The transceiver is based on a dual up-
conversion and triple down-conversion scheme, which allows the use of
wide-band duplex filters and therefore a wide choice of remote channel
frequency selection. To optimise the transmitter spectrum the transmitter
employs pre-distortion at IF as well as cable equalisation to correct for
variable loss and slope in the cable.
The microwave transmit/receive module consists of a multi-chip module
using a set of GaAs HEMT MMICs, both for the transmitter power
amplifier and the low-noise receiver. The required local oscillator signals
are fed from the synthesised local oscillator module and up-converted
using a diode multiplier. The channel frequency is remotely selected viathe IDU. Transmit/receive IF multiplexing, control and monitoring and
power supply functions are all integrated on the transceiver main board.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 39/374
B4008 Rev. M 39
Equipment Description
M A I N B O
A R D
M I C R O W A V E
C O N V E R T E R
2 1 0 M H z
7 - 9 G H z
S Y N T H E Z I S E R
T R A N S C E I V E R
A N T E N N A
D I P L E X E R
D I P L E X E R
D U P L E X
F R E Q .
U H F L O 1 ( L O 2 ) U
H F L O 2 ( L O 1 )
P R E -
D I S T
S L O P E
E Q U A L I S E R
Figure I-10 Block schematic view of the ODU Type III
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 40/374
40 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.0 ManagementAn integrated supervision system makes the CityLink capable of function-
ing as a Network Element (NE) in a managed SDH transmission network.
Management and supervision of the CityLink can be performed in various
ways from very simple alarm monitoring to standardised managementthrough optional built-in NE agents. Standardised use of QECC
, according
to ITU-T Rec. G.784, is provided.
As an option, the CityLink also supports embedded SNMP agent that can
be controlled by SNMP based manager supplied by the service provider.
For element and network management the NEW-NMS (Nera Element vieW
- Network Management System) software provides the full range of manage-
ment functionality; Fault, Performance, Security and Configuration.
The integrated SNMP agent provides interface to higher level Network
Management Systems.
The alternative interfaces available at the IDU are described in Appendix
I; IDU Interface Description.
5.0 System Configurations
CityLink is available in the following configurations:
Frequency Band L6 – 11 GHz 13 – 15 GHz 18 – 23 GHz 26 – 38 GHz
1+0 (Unprotected) OK
1+1 (Hot Standby) OK
1+1 Frequency Diversity OK NA
1+1 (Hot Standby) – Dual Baseband OK OK OK NA
1+1 (Hot Standby) – Dual antenna TBD TBD TBD OK
2+0 Dual frequency – Single polarisation (DF-SP)
OK
2+0 Single frequency – Dual Polarisation(SF-DP)
NA NA 32 TCM only 32 TCM only 1
2+0 Alternating Polarisation (AP) OK 1
1+0 prepared for 2+0 OK
Table I-1 System Configurations
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 41/374
B4008 Rev. M 41
Equipment Description
155 Mb/s
SDH/SONETProcessing
STM-1/OC-3Plug-inLine Interface
M o d u l a t o r
D e m o d u l a t o r
D C p o w e r f e e d i n g
& o v e r v o l t a g e
p r o t e c t i o n
Indoor unit (IDU)
Management&
SNMP Agent
Antenna
Transceiver
Branching
Auxtraffic
Management
OptionalPlug-in
Multiplex Unit
Coaxial cable(up to 300 m)
Figure I-11 1+0 System Overview
5.1 1+0Configuration
This system consists of one indoor unit and one outdoor unit interconnected
with a single coaxial cable.
Figure1-11 shows a 1+0 system overview. Each of the shaded area represents
a function or unit. The IDU is a single unit with plug-in STM-1 line interface
and the optional Multiplexer Unit. The ODU is assembled by transceiver and
branching.
Space Diversity and Hybrid Space Diversity is available as specified in the
table below.
Frequency Band L6 – 11 GHz 13 – 15 GHz 18 – 23 GHz 26 – 38 GHz
Space Diversity with IF combining
1+0,1+1 FD, HSB
OK NA NA NA
Hybrid Space Diversity (HSB) OK NA NA NA
Hybrid Space Diversity (1+1 FD) OK OK OK NA
Table I-2 Space Diversity Configurations
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 42/374
42 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
5.2 Hot Standby Configuration
In Hot Standby configuration the IDU, the transceiver unit, and the coaxial
cable between IDU and ODU are duplicated. The two transceivers share the
same branching unit/hybrid. A switch at radio frequency level, included in
the branching unit 1, allows for switching between the two transmitters. A
Switching Unit is placed between the two IDUs and performs hitlessswitching in the receive direction. The STM-1 line interface and Multiplex
plug-in modules are mounted in this switching unit. Signal interconnection
between the IDUs and the switching unit is by a multi connector and a split
cable.
1) Some ODU types use a passive combiner/splitter at RF level.
Indoor unit (IDU)
Outdoor unit (ODU)
Coaxial cable(up to 300 m)
Antenna unit
SDH/SONETProcessing
STM-1/OC-3Plug-inLine Interface
M o d u l a t o r
D e m o d u l a t o r
D C p o w e r f e e d i n
g
& o v e r v o l t a g e
p r o t e c t i o n
Management
Transceiver Unit
BranchingUnit
SDH/SONETProcessing
M o d u l a t o r
D e m o d u l a t o r
D C p o w e r f e e d i n g
& o v e r v o l t a g e
p r o t e c t i o n
Management
Transceiver Unit
Optionalplug-in
Multiplex UnitAux
traffic
Management
Management&
SNMP Agent
SDH/SONETProcessing
155Mbit/s
Figure I-12 1+1 Frequency Diversity and Hot Standby System Overview
5.3 1+1 Frequency Diversity
A 1+1 Frequency Diversity system contains duplicated IDU and ODU and
a 1+1 FD branching. (Dual polarised branching can also be used.). A
switching Unit is placed between the two IDUs and performs hitless
switching in the receive direction. The interface units are mounted in the
switching unit. Signal interconnection between the IDUs and the switching
unit is by a multi connector and a split cable.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 43/374
B4008 Rev. M 43
Equipment Description
5.4 Hot Standby Configuration – Dual Antenna
The Hot Standby configuration is for 26-38 GHz also available with duplicat-
ed antenna. There is no Tx-switch at radio frequency level and the standby
transmitter is muted. Both receivers are active and selection of receive signal
is performed by the IDU-switch. This configuration gives better system gain
as no HSB-hybrid loss is added.
Indoor unit (IDU)
Outdoor unit (ODU)
Coaxial cable(up to 300 m)
Antenna unit
SDH/SONETProcessing
STM-1/OC-3Plug-inLine Interface
M o d u l a t o r
D e m o d u l a t o r
D C p o w e r f e e d i n g
& o v e r v o l t a g e
p r o t e c t i o n
Management Transceiver Unit
BranchingUnit
SDH/SONETProcessing
M o d u l a t o r
D e m o d u l a t o r
D C p o w e r f e e d i n g
& o v e r v o l t a g e
p r o t e c t i o n
Management
Optionalplug-in
Multiplex UnitAux
traffic
Management
Management&
SNMP Agent
SDH/SONETProcessing
155Mbit/s
BranchingUnit
Transceiver Unit
Antenna unit
Figure I-13 Hot Standby-Dual Antenna System Overview
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 44/374
44 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
5.5 Hot Standby Configuration – Dual Baseband
A special variant of the Hot Standby system is the Dual baseband option.
In this configuration both IDUs are equipped with STM-1 line interface units.
The switching unit is not used in this configuration. The feature enables line
protection when used with muxes with dual/protected interfaces
Outdoor unit (ODU)
Coaxial cable(up to 300 m)
Antenna unit
Transceiver Unit
BranchingUnit
Transceiver Unit
155 Mb/s
SDH/SONETProcessing
STM-1/OC-3Plug-inLine Interface
M o d u l a t o r
D e m o d u l a t o r
D C p o w e r f e e d i n g
& o v e r v o l t a g e
p r o t e c t i o n
Management&
SNMP Agent
Auxtraffic
Management
155 Mb/s
SDH/SONETProcessing
STM-1/OC-3
Plug-inLine Interface
M o d u l a t o r
D e m o d u l a t o r
D C p o w e r f e e d i n g
& o v e r v o l t a g e
p r o t e c t i o n
Indoor unit (IDU)
Management&
SNMP Agent
Aux
traffic
Management
Figure I-14 Hot Standby-Dual Baseband System Overview
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 45/374
B4008 Rev. M 45
Equipment Description
5.6 2+0 Configuration
The 2+0 system can be used in two types of configuration, using one or two
polarisations. Single Frequency – Dual Polarisation (SF-DP) and Alternating
Polarisation (AP) utilise both polarisations in order to double the capacity.
Dual Frequency – Single Polarisation (DF-SP) requires two channels in order
to transmit 2xSTM-1. With this configuration, adjacent channels cannot beused. Figure I-15 and Figure I-16 show block diagrams of the 2+0 configu-
rations.
155 Mb/s
SDH/SONETProcessing
STM-1/OC-3Plug-inLine Interface
M o d u l a t o r
D e m o d u l a t o r
D C p o w e r f e e d i n g
& o v e r v o l t a g e
p r o t e c t i o n
Indoor unit (IDU)
Management&
SNMP Agent
SDH/SONETProcessing
STM-1/OC-3Plug-inLine Interface
M o d u l a t o r
D e m o d u l a t o r
D C p o w e r f e e d i n g
& o v e r v o l t a g e
p r o t e c t i o n
Indoor unit (IDU)
Management&
SNMP Agent
Outdoor unit (ODU)
Coaxial cable(up to 300 m)
Antenna
Transceiver
Branching
Auxtraffic
Management
Auxtraffic
Management
OptionalPlug-in
Multiplex Unit
OptionalPlug-in
Multiplex Unit
Transceiver
Branching
Coaxial cable
(up to 300 m)
H-pol
V-pol155 Mb/s
Figure I-15 Single Frequency - Dual Polarisation / Alternating
Polarisation
SDH/SONETProcessing
M
o d u l a t o r
D e m o d u l a t o r
D C p o w e r f e e d i n g
& o
v e r v o l t a g e
p r o t e c t i o n
Indoor unit (IDU)
Management&
SNMP Agent
SDH/SONETProcessing
M o d u l a t o r
D e m o d u l a t o r
D
C p o w e r f e e d i n g
& o v e r v o l t a g e
p r o t e c t i o n
Indoor unit (IDU)
Management&
SNMP Agent
Outdoor unit (ODU)
Coaxial cable(up to 300 m)
Antenna
Transceiver
Branching
Transceiver
Auxtraffic
Management
Auxtraffic
Management
OptionalPlug-in
Multiplex Unit
OptionalPlug-in
Multiplex Unit
STM-1/OC-3Plug-inLine Interface
STM-1/OC-3Plug-inLine Interface
155 Mb/s
155 Mb/s
Figure I-16 Dual Frequency - Single Polarisation
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 46/374
46 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
5.7 Space Diversity
Space diversity with IF combining is available in the frequencies from L6 to
11GHz. It can be used in combination with all other configurations. The figure
below shows a 1+1 Frequency Diversity or HSB system.
Outdoor unit (ODU)
Main Antenna
Main Branching
SD Antenna
SDTransceiver
SD Branching
SDTransceiver
Indoor unit (IDU)
SDH/SONETProcessing
M o d u l a t o r
D e m o d u l a t o r
D C p o w e r f e e d i n
g
& o v e r v o l t a g e
p r o t e c t i o n
Management
SDH/SONETProcessing
M o d u l a t o r
D e m o d u l a t o r
D C p o w e r f e e d i n g
& o v e r v o l t a g e
p r o t e c t i o n
Management
Coaxial cable(up to 300 m)
WG
STM-1/OC-3Plug-inLine Interface
Optionalplug-in
Multiplex UnitAux
traffic
Management
Management
&SNMP Agent
SDH/SONET
Processing
155Mbit/s
Figure I-17 Space Diversity
5.8 Hybrid Space Diversity
Hybrid Space Diversity using standard XCVRs without IF combining is
available for 1+1 FD and HSB.
In HSB configuration the splitter in the receiver branch is omitted and each
receiver is connected to separate antennas. The transmitters are using the
main antenna. Waveguide is needed from the ODU to the SD antenna. Theconfiguration is available for L6-11 GHz systems.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 47/374
B4008 Rev. M 47
Equipment Description
Outdoor unit (ODU)
Main
Antenna
Main Branching
SD
Antenna
Transceiver
SD Branching
Transceiver
Indoor unit (IDU)
SDH/SONETProcessing
M o d u l a t o r
D e m o d u l a t o r
D C p o w e r f e e d i n g
& o v e r v o l t a g e
p r o t e c t i o n
Management
SDH/SONETProcessing
M o d u l a t o r
D e m o d
u l a t o r
D C p o w e r f e e d i n g
& o v e r v
o l t a g e
p r o t e c t i o n
Management
Coaxial cable(up to 300 m)
WG
STM-1/OC-3Plug-inLine Interface
Optionalplug-in
Multiplex UnitAux
traffic
Management
Management&
SNMP Agent
SDH/SONETProcessing
155Mbit/s
In 1+1 system hybrid diversity is implemented by using two antennas at one
of the sites. At this site one channel is connected to each antenna. In principle
it is two 1+0 ODU operating at differnet frequencies. At the other site normal
1+1 FD system is used.
Figure I-18 HSB Hybrid Space Diversity
User Interfaces
IDU
IDU
Switch
1+0ODU
1+0ODU
IDU
IDU
Switch
User Interfaces1+1
ODU
f1
f2
Figure I-19 1+1 Hybrid Space Diversity
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 48/374
48 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
This page is intentionally left blank.
5.9 Radio Terminal Configurations
The radio channel can be configured with RS- or MS-termination according
to ITU-T Rec.G.783.
Figure 1-20 shows examples of various configurations. MST configuration
requires the optional SETS function.
RRT RRT RRTRRT
RS RS RS
MS MSMS
MS Other MSequipment
Other MSequipment
Figure I-20 Configuration Examples
5.10 Radio Repeater Configurations
A radio repeater is built by using two terminals. The interface between the
terminals is at STM-1. The repeater can be configured with RS-termination
according to ITU-T Rec. G.783.
5.11 Radio Channel Identification
The radio channel is identified by two allocated bits in the media specific byte
(MS#3) in the SOH. The channel identification can be configured by the user.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 49/374
B4008 Rev. M 49
ODU Type I Installation
Installation of
ODU Type I and Antenna
SECTION II
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 50/374
50 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
1.0 GeneralThis section assumes that pre-planning of the link has been performed, i.e.
path budgeting & survey to ensure good line-of sight between the two link
ends.
1.1 Packing
Any sensitive product, i.e. IDU and Printed Circuit Boards, are packed in
special antistatic handling bags or boxes.
It is therefore essential that whenever unpacking or disassembling the
equipment and or handling printed circuit boards etc., special precautions
to avoid ESD (Electro Static Discharge) should be taken, such as using
wrist grounding or corresponding protection.
The equipment is packed in sealed plastic bags which are equipped with
required moisture protection.
All equipment is further packed in special designed cases prepared for
transportation.
Dimensions and weight of each case are specified in the "Packing
specifications" issued for the respective shipment.
1.2 Marking
Marking is done according to customers requirements. If such informa-
tion is unavailable, the equipment is marked in the following way:
Customer address
Contract No.
Site Name (if known)Case No.
1.3 Transportation
The transport containers are prepared for shipment by air, truck, railway
and sea, suitable for handling by fork-lift trucks and slings.
The cargo must be kept dry during transport and storage.
For sea-transport, deck-side shipment is not permitted and carrier-ownedcargo containers should be used.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 51/374
B4008 Rev. M 51
ODU Type I Installation
1.4 Radio Equipment Inventory Check
Look for damage on the cases. Ensure that correct quantities of goods have
arrived, according to the packing list in each package/unit.
Check also that the part description on the outside of each box corre-
sponds to the components required for the installation, i.e. correct antennaand frequency, ODU frequency band and sub-band, IDU configuration.
Report any damages or missing items to Nera ASA by e-mail or fax. A short
description of damages, preferably including photographs, should be sent
as soon as possible.
1.5 Preparation for Installation
Complete the required civil works. Transport all the equipment to site.Unpack the equipment and inspect for damage during transit to site and
make sure that the correct quantities of goods have arrived.
Units with static discharge protection should not be unpacked until the
equipment installation takes place. Ensure you are grounded at a control-
led ESD point before and during insertion, and during any subsequent
unpacking of the unit.
1.6 Handling & Storage
It is recommended that components are stored and transported to the
installation site in their original packing cases. If items are unpacked for
storage, they should be handled with care and protected during transpor-
tation by similar protective materials.
The equipment is an electronic device which should be handled with care.
It should be stored in dry, cool conditions, out of direct sunlight. A
moisture absorbing bag is taped inside the transportation unit to minimisecondensation during transportation. This is to be removed at installation.
No maintenance is required when stored according to particulars above.
To avoid damage to the sealing components and unwanted moist in the
interconnection interfaces, the transportation protection lids on the branch-
ing and the transceiver must be kept on until mounting of waveguide
components and connection of the transceiver to the branching unit.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 52/374
52 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
2.0 Installation Equipment required
2.1 Tools
The tools needed to install the equipment are listed in the following sub-
chapters.
2.1.1 Tools for Antenna Installation
• 2 pcs Combination Wrench 13 mm
• 2 pcs Combination Wrench 16 mm
• 2 pcs Combination Wrench 17 mm
• 1 pc Torque Wrench 16 mm, 40 - 50 Nm
2.1.2 Tools for IDU- ODU Cable /Connector Mounting
• 1 Hacksaw, fine-toothed
• 1 Soldering Iron, 50-150W
• Solder 36/37 RMA flux core
• Cloth
• 1 Knife
• 1 Flat file, fine
• 1 Wire brush
• 1 Tape rule (or caliper)
• 1 Heat gun, 1000W• 1 Cutting pliers
for hexagon coupling nut :
• 1 Wrench 1/2" (13mm)
• 1 Wrench 9/16" (15mm)
• 1 Wrench 11/16" (18mm)
• 1 Wrench 13/16" (21mm)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 53/374
B4008 Rev. M 53
ODU Type I Installation
2.2 Equipment external to the Radio Equipment
In addition to the necessary radio equipment & antenna the following
items are needed:
• Coaxial cable between IDU and ODU. See Section V, chapter 5 for
advise on which cable to use.• At least two N-type connectors suitable for termination of the
selected coaxial cable.
• Suitable waveguide & flanges between antenna and branching unit if
remote mount option is used.
• Cable to ground the ODU.
• Cable to ground the IDU.
• Cable to power the IDU.
• Cable to connect the PC, running the configuration & set-up program,
to the IDU.• Cable ties to secure cable runs.
• Cables for user interfaces.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 54/374
54 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
3.0 ODU / Antenna Installation, 1+0 Equipment
3.1 Installation of 0.6m and 0.45m Antenna
3.1.1 Preparing the Suspension for ODU Mounting
Bracket
Loosen this nut one turn.
Rotate the bracket 1800 byturning this bolt CW.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 55/374
B4008 Rev. M 55
ODU Type I Installation
3.1.2 Mounting the Antenna to the Suspension
All the described nuts and washers are included in the antenna assembly
and come attached to the antenna.
4ea M8 Nuts and washers
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 56/374
56 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
3.1.3 Mounting the Branching Support Bracket
M8x25
BRANCHINGSUPPORTBRACKET
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 57/374
B4008 Rev. M 57
ODU Type I Installation
REAR TRAVERS
M8x25
M8x25
SUSPENSIONSUPPORTBRACKET
3.1.4 Mounting the Rear Travers
3.1.5 Mounting the Suspension Support Bracket
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 58/374
58 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
FEED
3.1.6 Mounting the Bend on the Branching Unit
M3 STUDS,NUTS ANDWASHERS
O-RING
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 59/374
B4008 Rev. M 59
ODU Type I Installation
3.1.8 Attachment of the Sunshield Support
Grounding point.See Section V Chapter 5.0 Fig. V-8
3.1.7 Installation of the Branching Unit
M8 STUDS,NUTS ANDWASHERS
BRANCHINGUNIT
SUNSHIELDSUPPORT
M8x30SCREW,NUT ANDWASHERS
M8x30 SCREW,NUT ANDWASHERS
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 60/374
60 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
3.1.9 Installation of the Flexible Waveguide
M3 STUDS,NUT AND
WASHERS
2 O-RINGS
M3 ALLENSCREWS,NUT ANDWASHERS
R220 FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE
O-RING
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 61/374
B4008 Rev. M 61
ODU Type I Installation
3.1.10 Installation of the Sunshield
SUNSHIELD
M4x16 SCREWS,NUTS ANDWASHERS
M6x25 SCREWS,NUTS, LARGE WASH-ERS AND WASHERS
M4 ALLEN SCREW(FOUND MOUNTEDON THE BRANCHINGUNIT)
(PLACING OFLARGE WASHER)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 62/374
62 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
U-BOLTS(ABZ5479 for columndiameter Ø115mm,
ABZ5480 for
columndiameter Ø75mm)
3.1.11 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Column or a Wall
3.1.11.1 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Column by
using the U-bolts
M10 Nuts, washers and lockwashers, 4eaTorque: 25-30Nm
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 63/374
B4008 Rev. M 63
ODU Type I Installation
3.1.11.2 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Column by
using the Clamps
CLAMPS, 2ea(ABZ5481)
M10 Nuts and washers, 4eaTorque: 35Nm
Column diameter:60-115mm
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 64/374
64 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
M10 Expansionbolts (typedependant onthe nature of thewall
M10 Nuts and washers
3.1.11.3 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Wall
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 65/374
B4008 Rev. M 65
ODU Type I Installation
3.1.12 Mounting the ODU to the Antenna Assembly
Before mounting the ODU to the antenna assembly, it is necessary to
remove the protection lid from the antenna feed. See below.
First remove the nuts usinga 5,5mm wrench.
Then remove the set screwsusing a 1,5 mm allen key.
Protection lid
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 66/374
66 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 67/374
B4008 Rev. M 67
ODU Type I Installation
BRANCHING
SUPPORTBRACKET
CLAMP
3.1.13 Pole Mount
3.1.13.1 Assembly of Branching Support Bracket
3.1.13.2 Installation of Branching Unit and Sun-shield
M8
M4
BRANCHING UNIT
SUN-SHIELD
M12 (Torque 19 NM)
Grounding point.See Section V Chapter 5.0 Fig. V-8
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 68/374
68 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
1 0 5 m m ±
5
3.2 Installation of 1.2m Antenna
This chapter only descibes how to install the CityLink branching support
bracket and the branching unit. For further instructions please refer to the
handbook supplied with the antenna (H2602; Installation Procedure for
1.2m Antenna).
For installation of the transceiver, see Chapter 3.1.7.
3.2.1 Assembly of Branching Support Bracket
BRANCHINGSUPPORTBRACKET
HORIZONTALGIRDER
VERTICALGIRDER
HORIZONTAL
GIRDER
BRANCHINGSUPPORT
BRACKET
Make sure that the distance between the top of the branching support
bracket and the horizontal girder is 105mm ±5mm.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 69/374
B4008 Rev. M 69
ODU Type I Installation
3.2.3 Installation of Branching Unit,
Sun-shield and Flexible Waveguide
NOTE!
Most antennas are delivered with a bimetallic shim. This MUST NOT be
mounted for 18-26GHz equipment as the ODU, the flexible waveguide
and the antenna all have aluminium waveguide connectors. Flexible
waveguides for 13-15GHz have silver plated brass flanges and the
bimetallic shim MUST be used (copper side facing flex-wg).
Mount gasket(s) between the antenna feed and the flexible waveguide
and also gasket(s) between the flexible waveguide and the branching
unit. If the installation is placed in a very corrosive environment, further protection can be achieved by adding silicon rubber.
M4 M8
BRANCHING UNIT
SUN-SHIELD
FLEXIBLEWAVEGUIDE
ANTENNAFEED
FLEXIBLEWAVEGUIDE
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 70/374
70 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.0 ODU / Antenna Installation,
Hot Standby Equipment and 2+0 Equipment
4.1 0.45m and 0.6m Antenna
4.1.1 Installation of Hot Standby (HSB) and
2+0 Dual Frequency Single Polarization Equipment
4.1.1.1 Preparing the Suspension for ODU Mounting and
Mounting the Antenna to the Suspension
Please refer to Chapters 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 (this Section).
4.1.1.2 Mounting the Branching Support Bracket
M8x25
BRANCHING
SUPPORTBRACKET
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 71/374
B4008 Rev. M 71
ODU Type I Installation
4.1.1.3 Mounting the Rear Travers, Mounting the Suspension
Support Bracket and Mounting the Feed on the
Branching Unit
Please refer to Chapters 3.1.4 to 3.1.6 (this Section).
4.1.1.4 Installation of the HSB Branching Unit
BRANCHING UNIT
M8x25STUDS,NUTS
ANDWASHERS
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 72/374
72 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.1.1.5 Installation of the Flexible Waveguide
M3 STUDS,NUT AND
WASHERS
2 O-RINGS
M3 ALLENSCREWS,NUT AND
WASHERS
R220 FLEXIBLEWAVEGUIDE
O-RING
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 73/374
B4008 Rev. M 73
ODU Type I Installation
4.1.1.6 Installation of the Sunshield Support Bracket
Please refer to Chapter 3.1.8 (this Section).
4.1.1.7 Installation of the Sunshield
SUNSHIELD
M4x16 SCREWS,NUTS ANDWASHERS
M6x25 SCREWS, NUTS,LARGE WASHERS ANDWASHERS
M4 ALLEN SCREW(FOUND MOUNTED
ON THE BRANCHINGUNIT)
(PLACING OFLARGE WASHER)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 74/374
74 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.1.1.8 Mounting the Suspension/ODU to a Column or a Wall
Please refer to Chapter 3.1.11 (this Section).
4.1.1.9 Mounting the ODU to the Antenna Assembly
Before mounting the ODU to the antenna assembly, it is necessary to
remove the protection lid from the antenna feed. Please refer to Chapter
3.1.12 (this Section) for details.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 75/374
B4008 Rev. M 75
ODU Type I Installation
4.1.1.10 Pole Mount
4.1.1.10.1 Assembly of Branching Support Bracket
4.1.10.1.2 Installation of Branching Unit and Sunshield
BRANCHING
SUPPORTBRACKET
CLAMP
M8
M4
BRANCHING UNIT
SUN-SHIELD
M12 (Torque 19 NM)
Grounding point.See Section V Chapter 5.0 Fig. V-9
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 76/374
76 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.1.2 Installation of 2+0 Equipment
(Single Frequency Dual polarity)
4.1.2.1 Preparing the Suspension for ODU Mounting and
Mounting the Antenna to the SuspensionPlease refer to Chapters 3.1.1 and 3.1.2 (this Section).
4.1.2.2 Mounting the Branching Support Bracket, Mounting the
Rear Travers, Mounting the Suspension Support
Bracket and Mounting the Feed on the Branching Units
Please refer to Chapters 3.1.3 to 3.1.6 (this Section).
M8 STUDS,NUTS ANDWASHERS
4.1.2.3 Installation of the Branching Units
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 77/374
B4008 Rev. M 77
ODU Type I Installation
4.1.2.4 Installation of the Flexible Waveguide
M3 STUDS,NUT ANDWASHERS
2 O-RINGS
M3 ALLENSCREWS,NUT ANDWASHERS
R220 FLEXIBLEWAVEGUIDE
O-RING
M3 ALLENSCREWS,NUT ANDWASHERS
M3 STUDS,NUT ANDWASHERS
2 O-RINGS
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 78/374
78 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.1.2.5 Installation of the Sunshield
M6x25 SCREWS,
NUTS, LARGE WASH-
ERS AND WASHERS
M4 ALLEN SCREW
(FOUND MOUNTED
ON THE BRANCHING
UNIT)
(PLACING OF
LARGE WASHER)
M4 ALLEN SCREW
(FOUND MOUNTEDON THE BRANCHING
UNIT)SUNSHIELDS
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 79/374
B4008 Rev. M 79
ODU Type I Installation
4.1.2.6 Mounting the Suspension/ODU to a Column or a Wall
Please refer to Chapter 3.1.11 (this Section).
4.1.2.7 Mounting the ODU to the Antenna Assembly
Before mounting the ODU to the antenna assembly, it is necessary to
remove the protection lid from the antenna feed. Please refer to Chapter
3.1.12 (this Section) for details.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 80/374
80 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.1.2.9.2 Installation of Branching Units and Sunshields
M8
M4
BRANCHING UNITS
SUN-SHIELDS
Grounding point.See Section V Chapter 5.0 Fig. V-9
4.1.2.9 Pole Mount
4.1.2.9.1 Assembly of Branching Support Bracket
BRANCHING
SUPPORTBRACKET
CLAMP
M12 (Torque 19 NM)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 81/374
B4008 Rev. M 81
ODU Type I Installation
4.2 1.2m Antenna
This chapter only descibes how to install the CityLink branching support
bracket and the branching unit. For further instructions please refer to the
handbook supplied with the antenna (H2602; Installation Procedure for
1.2m Antenna).
For installation of the transceiver, see Chapter 4.1.5.
4.2.1 Assembly of Branching Support Bracket
8 7 m
m ±
5
BRANCHINGSUPPORTBRACKET
HORIZONTALGIRDER
VERTICALGIRDER
HORIZONTALGIRDER
BRANCHINGSUPPORT
BRACKET
Make sure that the distance between the top of the branching support
bracket and the horizontal girder is 130mm ±3mm.
1 3 0 m m
± 3 m m
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 82/374
82 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.2.2 Installation of Branching Unit, Sun-shield and Flexible
Waveguide
4.2.2.1 Hot Standby and 2+0 Dual Frequency Single Polarization
FLEXIBLEWAVEGUIDE
BRANCHING UNIT
M4M8
SUN-SHIELD
NOTE!
Most antennas are delivered with a bimetallic shim. This MUST
NOT be mounted for CityLink installations as the ODU, theflexible waveguide and the antenna all have aluminium waveguide
connectors.
Mount gasket(s) between the antenna feed and the flexible
waveguide and also gasket(s) between the flexible waveguide
and the branching unit. If the installation is placed in a very
corrosive environment, further protection can be achieved by
adding silicon rubber.
Grounding point.See Section V Chapter 5.0Fig. V-9
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 83/374
B4008 Rev. M 83
ODU Type I Installation
4.2.2.2 2+0 Single Frequency Dual Polarization
FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDES
BRANCHING UNITS
M4
M8
SUN-SHIELDS
Grounding point.See Section V Chapter 5.0
Fig. V-9
NOTE!
Most antennas are delivered with a bimetallic shim. This MUST
NOT be mounted for 18-26GHz equipment as the ODU, the
flexible waveguide and the antenna all have aluminium
waveguide connectors. Flexible waveguides for 13-15GHz have
silver plated brass flanges and the bimetallic shim MUST beused (copper side facing flex-wg).
Mount gasket(s) between the antenna feed and the flexible
waveguide and also gasket(s) between the flexible waveguide
and the branching unit. If the installation is placed in a very
corrosive environment, further protection can be achieved by
adding silicon rubber.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 84/374
84 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
5.0 Frequency Tuning at 13GHz &15GHz Transceiver This chapter gives a short description of how to set and change frequency
channel on the transceiver. To perform this operation it is necessary to
remove the cover and mount the transceiver to a branching connected to
an IDU. A PC (where Nera software NEW is installed) and power arefurther connected to the IDU. A voltage meter and a screwdriver must also
be available.
• Switch on the power at the system
• Set wanted frequency in New.
Tables II-1 to II-9 give the relation between selected channel, duplex, TX
High/Low and RX High/Low. The illustration on the next page gives an
overview of the tuning voltage connectors (VT TX and VT RX) and tuningscrews.
WARNING!
This equipment contains components which are sensitive to
"ESD" (Electro Static Discharge). It is therefore essential that
whenever disassembling the equipment and/or handling PC
boards, special precautions to avoid ESD have to be made.
This includes personnel grounding, grounding of work bench,grounding of tools and instruments. For the tuning process,
it is also recommended to use a ceramic screw driver.
• Measure the tuning voltage VT TX continuously while adjusting the
tuning screw. First turn the tuning screw CCW as far as it goes. Then
adjust it CW until VT TX reaches the correct voltage:
For 15GHz Transceiver; 4±0.5[V]
For 13GHz Transceiver; 3±0.5[V]
• Measure the tuning voltage VT RX continuously when adjusting the
tuning screw. First turn the tuning screw CCW as far as it goes. Then
adjust it CW until VT TX reaches the correct voltage:
For 15GHz Transceiver; 4±0.5[V]
For 13GHz Transceiver; 3±0.5[V]
After tuning VT TX and VT RX to the correct voltage, the transceiver is
configured to the correct frequency channel. Inspect the gasket and
replace the cover with use of correct torque (1.25Nm).
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 85/374
B4008 Rev. M 85
ODU Type I Installation
GND VT TX
Rx HighTx High
Rx LowTx Low
VT RX
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 86/374
86 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Duplex frequency: 490 MHzChannel spacing: 28MHz
10L15L01A 10L15U01A
TX
Ch.
TX
Freq.
TX
DRO
RX
Ch.
RX
Freq.
RX
DRO
TX
Ch.
TX
Freq.
TX
DRO
RX
Ch.
RX
Freq.
RX
DRO1 14417 Low 1’ 14907 Low 1’ 14907 Low 1 14417 Low
2 14445 Low 2’ 14935 Low 2’ 14935 Low 2 14445 Low
3 14473 Low 3’ 14963 Low 3’ 14963 Low 3 14473 Low
4 14501 Low 4’ 14991 Low 4’ 14991 Low 4 14501 Low5 14529 Low 5’ 15019 Low 5’ 15019 Low 5 14529 Low
6 14557 Low 6’ 15047 Low 6’ 15047 Low 6 14557 Low7 14585 Low 7’ 15075 Low 7’ 15075 Low 7 14585 Low
8 14613 Low 8’ 15103 Low 8’ 15103 Low 8 14613 Low
9 14641 Low 9’ 15131 Low 9’ 15131 High 9 14641 Low
10 14669 High 10’ 15159 Low 10’ 15159 High 10 14669 Low
11 14697 High 11’ 15187 Low 11’ 15187 High 11 14697 High
12 14725 High 12’ 15215 High 12’ 15215 High 12 14725 High
13 14753 High 13’ 15243 High 13’ 15243 High 13 14753 High
14 14781 High 14’ 15271 High 14’ 15271 High 14 14781 High
15 14809 High 15’ 15299 High 15’ 15299 High 15 14809 High
16 14837 High 16’ 15327 High 16’ 15327 High 16 14837 High
Duplex frequency: 420 MHzChannel spacing: 28MHz
10L15L01A 10L15U01A
TX
Ch.
TX
Freq.
TX
DRO
RX
Ch.
RX
Freq.
RX
DRO
TX
Ch.
TX
Freq.
TX
DRO
RX
Ch.
RX
Freq.
RX
DRO1 14515 Low 1’ 14935 Low 1’ 14935 Low 1 14515 Low
2 14543 Low 2’ 14963 Low 2’ 14963 Low 2 14543 Low3 14571 Low 3’ 14991 Low 3’ 14991 Low 3 14571 Low4 14599 Low 4’ 15019 Low 4’ 15019 Low 4 14599 Low
5 14627 Low 5’ 15047 Low 5’ 15047 Low 5 14627 Low
6 14655 Low 6’ 15075 Low 6’ 15075 Low 6 14655 Low
7 14683 High 7’ 15103 Low 7’ 15103 Low 7 14683 High
8 14711 High 8’ 15131 High 8’ 15131 High 8 14711 High
9 14739 High 9’ 15159 High 9’ 15159 High 9 14739 High
10 14767 High 10’ 15187 High 10’ 15187 High 10 14767 High
11 14795 High 11’ 15215 High 11’ 15215 High 11 14795 High12 14823 High 12’ 15243 High 12’ 15243 High 12 14823 High
13 14851 High 13’ 15271 High 13’ 15271 High 13 14851 High
14 14879 High 14’ 15299 High 14’ 15299 High 14 14879 High
15 14907 High 15’ 15327 High 15’ 15327 High 15 14907 High
Duplex frequency: 728 MHzChannel spacing: 28MHz
10L15L01A 10L15U01A
TXCh.
TXFreq.
TXDRO
RXCh.
RXFreq.
RXDRO
TXCh.
TXFreq.
TXDRO
RXCh.
RXFreq.
RXDRO
1 14515 Low 1’ 15243 High 1’ 15243 High 1 14515 Low2 14543 Low 2’ 15271 High 2’ 15271 High 2 14543 Low3 14571 Low 3’ 15299 High 3’ 15299 High 3 14571 Low4 14599 Low 4’ 15327 High 4’ 15327 High 4 14599 Low
Table II-1
Table II-2
Table II-3
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 87/374
B4008 Rev. M 87
ODU Type I Installation
Duplex frequency: 315 MHz
Channel spacing: 28MHz
10L15L01A 10L15U01A
TX
Ch.
TX
Freq.
TX
DRO
RX
Ch.
RX
Freq.
RX
DRO
TX
Ch.
TX
Freq.
TX
DRO
RX
Ch.
RX
Freq.
RX
DRO
1 14662 Low 1’ 14977 Low 1’ 14977 Low 1 14662 Low
2 14690 High 2’ 15005 Low 2’ 15005 Low 2 14690 High
3 14718 High 3’ 15033 Low 3’ 15033 Low 3 14718 High
4 14746 High 4’ 15061 Low 4’ 15061 Low 4 14746 High5 14774 High 5’ 15089 Low 5’ 15089 Low 5 14774 High
6 14802 High 6’ 15117 Low 6’ 15117 Low 6 14802 High
7 14830 High 7’ 15145 High 7’ 15145 High 7 14830 High
8 14858 High 8’ 15173 High 8’ 15173 High 8 14858 High
9 14886 High 9’ 15201 High 9’ 15201 High 9 14886 High
Duplex frequency: 420 MHz
Channel spacing: 14MHz
10L15L01A 10L15U01A
TX
Ch.
TX
Freq.
TX
DRO
RX
Ch.
RX
Freq.
RX
DRO
TX
Ch.
TX
Freq.
TX
DRO
RX
Ch.
RX
Freq.
RX
DRO1 14515 Low 1’ 14935 Low 1’ 14935 Low 1 14515 Low
2 14529 Low 2’ 14949 Low 2’ 14949 Low 2 14529 Low
3 14543 Low 3’ 14963 Low 3’ 14963 Low 3 14543 Low
4 14557 Low 4’ 14977 Low 4’ 14977 Low 4 14557 Low
5 14571 Low 5’ 14991 Low 5’ 14991 Low 5 14571 Low
6 14585 Low 6’ 15005 Low 6’ 15005 Low 6 14585 Low7 14599 Low 7’ 15019 Low 7’ 15019 Low 7 14599 Low
8 14613 Low 8’ 15033 Low 8’ 15033 Low 8 14613 Low
9 14627 Low 9’ 15047 Low 9’ 15047 Low 9 14627 Low10 14641 Low 10’ 15061 Low 10’ 15061 Low 10 14641 Low
11 14655 Low 11’ 15075 Low 11’ 15075 Low 11 14655 Low
12 14669 High 12’ 15089 Low 12’ 15089 Low 12 14669 Low
13 14683 High 13’ 15103 Low 13’ 15103 Low 13 14683 High
14 14697 High 14’ 15117 Low 14’ 15117 Low 14 14697 High15 14711 High 15’ 15131 High 15’ 15131 High 15 14711 High
16 14725 High 16’ 15145 High 16’ 15145 High 16 14725 High
17 14739 High 17’ 15159 High 17’ 15159 High 17 14739 High
18 14753 High 18’ 15173 High 18’ 15173 High 18 14753 High
19 14767 High 19’ 15187 High 19’ 15187 High 19 14767 High
20 14781 High 20’ 15201 High 20’ 15201 High 20 14781 High
21 14795 High 21’ 15215 High 21’ 15215 High 21 14795 High
22 14809 High 22’ 15229 High 22’ 15229 High 22 14809 High
23 14823 High 23’ 15243 High 23’ 15243 High 23 14823 High
24 14837 High 24’ 15257 High 24’ 15257 High 24 14837 High
25 14851 High 25’ 15271 High 25’ 15271 High 25 14851 High
26 14865 High 26’ 15285 High 26’ 15285 High 26 14865 High
27 14879 High 27’ 15299 High 27’ 15299 High 27 14879 High
28 14893 High 28’ 15313 High 28’ 15313 High 28 14893 High29 14907 High 29’ 15327 High 29’ 15327 High 29 14907 High
30 14921 High 30’ 15341 High 30’ 15341 High 30 14921 High
Table II-4
Table II-6
Duplex frequency: 644 MHzChannel spacing: 28MHz
10L15L01A 10L15U01A
TXCh.
TXFreq.
TXDRO
RXCh.
RXFreq.
RXDRO
TXCh.
TXFreq.
TXDRO
RXCh.
RXFreq.
RXDRO
1 14515 Low 1’ 15159 High 1’ 15159 High 1 14515 Low2 14543 Low 2’ 15187 High 2’ 15187 High 2 14543 Low3 14571 Low 3’ 15215 High 3’ 15215 High 3 14571 Low4 14599 Low 4’ 15243 High 4’ 15243 High 4 14599 Low5 14627 Low 5’ 15271 High 5’ 15271 High 5 14627 Low6 14655 Low 6’ 15299 High 6’ 15299 High 6 14655 Low7 14683 High 7’ 15327 High 7’ 15327 High 7 14683 High
Table II-5
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 88/374
88 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Duplex frequency: 490 MHzChannel spacing: 14MHz
10L15L01A 10L15U01A
TX
Ch.
TX
Freq.
TX
DRO
RX
Ch.
RX
Freq.
RX
DRO
TX
Ch.
TX
Freq.
TX
DRO
RX
Ch.
RX
Freq.
RX
DRO
1 14417 Low 1’ 14907 Low 1’ 14907 Low 1 14417 Low2 14431 Low 2’ 14921 Low 2’ 14921 Low 2 14431 Low
3 14445 Low 3’ 14935 Low 3’ 14935 Low 3 14445 Low4 14459 Low 4’ 14949 Low 4’ 14949 Low 4 14459 Low
5 14473 Low 5’ 14963 Low 5’ 14963 Low 5 14473 Low
6 14487 Low 6’ 14977 Low 6’ 14977 Low 6 14487 Low
7 14501 Low 7’ 14991 Low 7’ 14991 Low 7 14501 Low
8 14515 Low 8’ 15005 Low 8’ 15005 Low 8 14515 Low
9 14529 Low 9’ 15019 Low 9’ 15019 Low 9 14529 Low
10 14543 Low 10’ 15033 Low 10’ 15033 Low 10 14543 Low
11 14557 Low 11’ 15047 Low 11’ 15047 Low 11 14557 Low
12 14571 Low 12’ 15061 Low 12’ 15061 Low 12 14571 Low13 14585 Low 13’ 15075 Low 13’ 15075 Low 13 14585 Low
14 14599 Low 14’ 15089 Low 14’ 15089 Low 14 14599 Low
15 14613 Low 15’ 15103 Low 15’ 15103 Low 15 14613 Low
16 14627 Low 16’ 15117 Low 16’ 15117 Low 16 14627 Low17 14641 High 17’ 15131 Low 17’ 15131 High 17 14641 Low
18 14655 High 18’ 15145 Low 18’ 15145 High 18 14655 Low19 14669 High 19’ 15159 High 19’ 15159 High 19 14669 Low
20 14683 High 20’ 15173 High 20’ 15173 High 20 14683 High
21 14697 High 21’ 15187 High 21’ 15187 High 21 14697 High
22 14711 High 22’ 15201 High 22’ 15201 High 22 14711 High
23 14725 High 23’ 15215 High 23’ 15215 High 23 14725 High
24 14739 High 24’ 15229 High 24’ 15229 High 24 14739 High
25 14753 High 25’ 15243 High 25’ 15243 High 25 14753 High
26 14767 High 26’ 15257 High 26’ 15257 High 26 14767 High
27 14781 High 27’ 15271 High 27’ 15271 High 27 14781 High28 14795 High 28’ 15285 High 28’ 15285 High 28 14795 High
29 14809 High 29’ 15299 High 29’ 15299 High 29 14809 High
30 14823 High 30’ 15313 High 30’ 15313 High 30 14823 High31 14837 High 31’ 15327 High 31’ 15327 High 31 14837 High
32 14851 High 32’ 15341 High 32’ 15341 High 32 14851 High
Table II-7
Duplex frequency: 266 MHz
Channel spacing: 28MHz
10L13L01A 10L13U01A
TX
Ch.
TX
Freq.
TX
DRO
RX
Ch.
RX
Freq.
RX
DRO
TX
Ch.
TX
Freq.
TX
DRO
RX
Ch.
RX
Freq.
RX
DRO
1 12765 Low 1’ 13031 High 1’ 13031 High 1 12765 Low
2 12793 Low 2’ 13059 High 2’ 13059 High 2 12793 Low
3 12821 Low 3’ 13087 High 3’ 13087 High 3 12821 Low4 12849 Low 4’ 13115 High 4’ 13115 High 4 12849 Low
5 12877 Low 5’ 13143 High 5’ 13143 High 5 12877 Low
6 12905 Low 6’ 13171 High 6’ 13171 High 6 12905 Low7 12933 Low 7’ 13199 High 7’ 13199 High 7 12933 Low
8 12961 Low 8’ 13227 High 8’ 13227 High 8 12961 Low
Table II-8
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 89/374
B4008 Rev. M 89
ODU Type I Installation
Duplex frequency: 266 MHzChannel spacing: 14MHz
10L13L01A 10L13U01A
TX
Ch.
TX
Freq.
TX
DRO
RX
Ch.
RX
Freq.
RX
DRO
TX
Ch.
TX
Freq.
TX
DRO
RX
Ch.
RX
Freq.
RX
DRO1 12758 Low 1’ 13024 High 1’ 13024 High 1 12758 Low
2 12772 Low 2’ 13038 High 2’ 13038 High 2 12772 Low
3 12786 Low 3’ 13052 High 3’ 13052 High 3 12786 Low
4 12800 Low 4’ 13066 High 4’ 13066 High 4 12800 Low5 12814 Low 5’ 13080 High 5’ 13080 High 5 12814 Low
6 12828 Low 6’ 13094 High 6’ 13094 High 6 12828 Low7 12842 Low 7’ 13108 High 7’ 13108 High 7 12842 Low
8 12856 Low 8’ 13122 High 8’ 13122 High 8 12856 Low
9 12870 Low 9’ 13136 High 9’ 13136 High 9 12870 Low10 12884 Low 10’ 13150 High 10’ 13150 High 10 12884 Low
11 12898 Low 11’ 13164 High 11’ 13164 High 11 12898 Low
12 12912 Low 12’ 13178 High 12’ 13178 High 12 12912 Low13 12926 Low 13’ 13192 High 13’ 13192 High 13 12926 Low
14 12940 Low 14’ 13206 High 14’ 13206 High 14 12940 Low15 12954 Low 15’ 13220 High 15’ 13220 High 15 12954 Low16 12968 Low 16’ 13234 High 16’ 13234 High 16 12968 Low
Table II-9
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 90/374
90 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
6.0 Cable ConnectionsPlease refer to Section V Chapter 5.0.
7.0 Antenna AlignmentPlease refer to Section IV Chapter 6.0.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 91/374
B4008 Rev. M 91
ODU Type II Installation
Installation of
ODU Type II and Antenna
SECTION III
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 92/374
92 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
1.0 GeneralThis section assumes that pre-planning of the link has been performed, i.e.
path budgeting & survey to ensure good line-of sight between the two link
ends.
1.1 Packing
Any sensitive product, i.e. IDU and Printed Circuit Boards, are packed in
special antistatic handling bags or boxes.
It is therefore essential that whenever unpacking or disassembling the
equipment and or handling printed circuit boards etc., special precautions
to avoid ESD (Electro Static Discharge) should be taken, such as using
wrist grounding or corresponding protection.
The equipment is packed in sealed plastic bags which are equipped with
required moisture protection.
All equipment is further packed in special designed cases prepared for
transportation.
Dimensions and weight of each case are specified in the "Packing
specifications" issued for the respective shipment.
1.2 Marking
Marking is done according to customers requirements. If such informa-
tion is unavailable, the equipment is marked in the following way:
Customer address
Contract No.
Site Name (if known)Case No.
1.3 Transportation
The transport containers are prepared for shipment by air, truck, railway
and sea, suitable for handling by fork-lift trucks and slings.
The cargo must be kept dry during transport and storage.
For sea-transport, deck-side shipment is not permitted and carrier-ownedcargo containers should be used.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 93/374
B4008 Rev. M 93
ODU Type II Installation
1.4 Radio Equipment Inventory Check
Look for damage on the cases. Ensure that correct quantities of goods have
arrived, according to the packing list in each package/unit.
Check also that the part description on the outside of each box corre-
sponds to the components required for the installation, i.e. correct antennaand frequency, ODU frequency band and sub-band, IDU configuration.
Report any damages or missing items to Nera ASA by e-mail or fax. A short
description of damages, preferably including photographs, should be sent
as soon as possible.
1.5 Preparation for Installation
Complete the required civil works. Transport all the equipment to site.Unpack the equipment and inspect for damage during transit to site and
make sure that the correct quantities of goods have arrived.
Units with static discharge protection should not be unpacked until the
equipment installation takes place. Ensure you are grounded at a control-
led ESD point before and during insertion, and during any subsequent
unpacking of the unit.
1.6 Handling & Storage
It is recommended that components are stored and transported to the
installation site in their original packing cases. If items are unpacked for
storage, they should be handled with care and protected during transpor-
tation by similar protective materials.
The equipment is an electronic device which should be handled with care.
It should be stored in dry, cool conditions, out of direct sunlight. A
moisture absorbing bag is taped inside the transportation unit to minimisecondensation during transportation. This is to be removed at installation.
No maintenance is required when stored according to particulars above.
To avoid damage to the sealing components and unwanted moist in the
interconnection interfaces, the transportation protection lids on the branch-
ing and the transceiver must be kept on until mounting of waveguide
components and connection of the transceiver to the branching unit.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 94/374
94 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
2.0 Installation Equipment required
2.1 Tools
The tools needed to install the equipment are listed in the following sub-
chapters.
2.1.1 Tools for Antenna Installation
• 2 pcs Combination Wrench 13 mm
• 2 pcs Combination Wrench 16 mm
• 2 pcs Combination Wrench 17 mm
• 1 pc Torque Wrench 16 mm, 40 - 50 Nm
2.1.2 Tools for IDU- ODU Cable /Connector Mounting
• 1 Hacksaw, fine-toothed
• 1 Soldering Iron, 50-150W
• Solder 36/37 RMA flux core
• Cloth
• 1 Knife
• 1 Flat file, fine
• 1 Wire brush
• 1 Tape rule (or caliper)
• 1 Heat gun, 1000W• 1 Cutting pliers
for hexagon coupling nut :
• 1 Wrench 1/2" (13mm)
• 1 Wrench 9/16" (15mm)
• 1 Wrench 11/16" (18mm)
• 1 Wrench 13/16" (21mm)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 95/374
B4008 Rev. M 95
ODU Type II Installation
2.2 Equipment external to the Radio Equipment
In addition to the necessary radio equipment & antenna the following
items are needed:
• Coaxial cable between IDU and ODU. See Section V, chapter 5 for
advise on which cable to use.• At least two N-type connectors suitable for termination of the
selected coaxial cable.
• Suitable waveguide & flanges between antenna and branching unit if
remote mount option is used.
• Cable to ground the ODU.
• Cable to ground the IDU.
• Cable to power the IDU.
• Cable to connect the PC, running the configuration & set-up program,
to the IDU.• Cable ties to secure cable runs.
• Cables for user interfaces.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 96/374
96 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
3.0 ODU Installation
3.1 Mounting the ODU to the Pole
The ODU can be mounted to a Ø75mm or a Ø115mm pole, see figure
below.
2 x M10 NUTS AND
WASHER
SUN-SHIELD
U-BOLTS
Waveguide Flange type:PDR84
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 97/374
B4008 Rev. M 97
ODU Type II Installation
ODU BOTTOM VIEW:
3.2 Cable Connections
Pressureequalizer
AGC Connector
IDU - ODU Cable Connector, N-50WFor details please see Figure V-7.
Ground connection. Attach ground-ing cable (10mm2) to this point withthe M6 nut and washers.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 98/374
98 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.0 Antenna and Waveguide Installation
4.1 0.6m Antenna
Shim Copper/ Aluminium
Copper side Alu side
Flange Adapter (NL2007 only)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 99/374
B4008 Rev. M 99
ODU Type II Installation
4.2 1.2m Antenna
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 100/374
100 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.3 2m Antenna
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 101/374
B4008 Rev. M 101
ODU Type II Installation
4.4 2.4m
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 102/374
102 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.5 3m
317±20
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 103/374
B4008 Rev. M 103
ODU Type III Installation
Installation of
ODU Type III and Antenna
SECTION IV
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 104/374
104 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
1.0 GeneralThis section assumes that pre-planning of the link has been performed, i.e.
path budgeting & survey to ensure good line-of sight between the two link
ends.
1.1 Packing
Any sensitive product, i.e. IDU and Printed Circuit Boards, are packed in
special antistatic handling bags or boxes.
It is therefore essential that whenever unpacking or disassembling the
equipment and or handling printed circuit boards etc., special precautions
to avoid ESD (Electro Static Discharge) should be taken, such as using
wrist grounding or corresponding protection.
The equipment is packed in sealed plastic bags which are equipped with
required moisture protection.
All equipment is further packed in special designed cases prepared for
transportation.
Dimensions and weight of each case are specified in the "Packing
specifications" issued for the respective shipment.
1.2 Marking
Marking is done according to customers requirements. If such informa-
tion is unavailable, the equipment is marked in the following way:
Customer address
Contract No.
Site Name (if known)Case No.
1.3 Transportation
The transport containers are prepared for shipment by air, truck, railway
and sea, suitable for handling by fork-lift trucks and slings.
The cargo must be kept dry during transport and storage.
For sea-transport, deck-side shipment is not permitted and carrier-ownedcargo containers should be used.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 105/374
B4008 Rev. M 105
ODU Type III Installation
1.4 Radio Equipment Inventory Check
Look for damage on the cases. Ensure that correct quantities of goods have
arrived, according to the packing list in each package/unit.
Check also that the part description on the outside of each box corre-
sponds to the components required for the installation, i.e. correct antennaand frequency, ODU frequency band and sub-band, IDU configuration.
Report any damages or missing items to Nera ASA by e-mail or fax. A short
description of damages, preferably including photographs, should be sent
as soon as possible.
1.5 Preparation for Installation
Complete the required civil works. Transport all the equipment to site.Unpack the equipment and inspect for damage during transit to site and
make sure that the correct quantities of goods have arrived.
Units with static discharge protection should not be unpacked until the
equipment installation takes place. Ensure you are grounded at a control-
led ESD point before and during insertion, and during any subsequent
unpacking of the unit.
1.6 Handling & Storage
It is recommended that components are stored and transported to the
installation site in their original packing cases. If items are unpacked for
storage, they should be handled with care and protected during transpor-
tation by similar protective materials.
The equipment is an electronic device which should be handled with care.
It should be stored in dry, cool conditions, out of direct sunlight. A
moisture absorbing bag is taped inside the transportation unit to minimisecondensation during transportation. This is to be removed at installation.
No maintenance is required when stored according to particulars above.
To avoid damage to the sealing components and unwanted moist in the
interconnection interfaces, the transportation protection lids on the branch-
ing and the transceiver must be kept on until mounting of waveguide
components and connection of the transceiver to the branching unit.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 106/374
106 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
2.0 Installation Equipment required
2.1 Tools
The tools needed to install the equipment are listed in the following sub-
chapters.
2.1.1 Tools for Antenna Installation and Adjustment
• 2 pcs Combination Wrench M8, 13 mm
• 2 pcs Combination Wrench M10, 16 mm
• 2 pcs Combination Wrench M6, 10 mm
• 1 pc Combination Wrench 10 mm
• 1 pc Torque Wrench, M16, 24 mm, 120 Nm
2.1.2 Tools for IDU- ODU Cable /Connector Mounting
• 1 Hacksaw, fine-toothed
• 1 Soldering Iron, 50-150W
• Solder 36/37 RMA flux core
• Cloth
• 1 Knife
• 1 Flat file, fine
• 1 Wire brush
• 1 Tape rule (or caliper)• 1 Heat gun, 1000W
• 1 Cutting pliers
for hexagon coupling nut :
• 1 Wrench 1/2" (13mm)
• 1 Wrench 9/16" (15mm)
• 1 Wrench 11/16" (18mm)
• 1 Wrench 13/16" (21mm)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 107/374
B4008 Rev. M 107
ODU Type III Installation
2.2 Equipment external to the Radio Equipment
In addition to the necessary radio equipment & antenna the following
items are needed:
• Coaxial cable between IDU and ODU. See Section V, chapter 5 for
advise on which cable to use.• At least two N-type connectors suitable for termination of the
selected coaxial cable.
• Suitable waveguide & flanges between antenna and branching unit if
remote mount option is used.
• Cable to ground the ODU.
• Cable to ground the IDU.
• Cable to power the IDU.
• Cable to connect the PC, running the configuration & set-up program,
to the IDU.• Cable ties to secure cable runs.
• Cables for user interfaces.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 108/374
108 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
3.0 ODU / Antenna Installation, 1+0 Equipment
3.1 Mounting the Antenna to the Suspension
All the described nuts and washers are included in the antenna assembly
and come attached to the antenna.
4ea M8 Nuts, washersand lock washers
SUSPENSION (3AB5158A)
ANTENNA(0,3m 0,45m and 0,6m)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 109/374
B4008 Rev. M 109
ODU Type III Installation
3.2 Mounting the Sunshield
The Sunshield, screws, nuts and washers are found in the kit AZZ5495.
M6 Nuts, washersand lock washers(4ea)
M6 Screws (4ea)
SUNSHIELD
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 110/374
110 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
U-BOLTS(ABZ5479 for columndiameter Ø115mm,
ABZ5480 for columndiameter Ø75mm)
3.3 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Column by
using the U-bolts
M10 Nuts, washers and lockwashers, 4eaTorque: 25-30Nm
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 111/374
B4008 Rev. M 111
ODU Type III Installation
CLAMPS, 2ea(ABZ5481)
M10 Nuts and washers, 4eaTorque: 35Nm
Column diameter:60-115mm
3.4 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Column by
using the Clamps
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 112/374
112 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
STEP 1 Mounting the Brackets on the Frame
4ea M8x20 screws8ea Flat washers4ea Lock washers4ea M8 Nuts(Kit:ABZ5774)
Bracket(Kit: ABZ5774)
Bracket(Kit: ABZ5774)
3.5 Mounting the Transceiver
(without Antenna) to a Column
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 113/374
B4008 Rev. M 113
ODU Type III Installation
STEP 2 Attaching the Frame to the Column
2ea M10 U-bolts(Kit: ABZ5774)
4ea M10 Flat washers8ea M10 Nuts(Kit:ABZ5774)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 114/374
114 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
STEP 3 Mounting the Sunshields
Sunshields(Kit: ABZ5779)
2ea M5x12 screws8ea M5 flat washers
4ea M5 lock washers4ea M5 nuts(Kit: ABZ5774)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 115/374
B4008 Rev. M 115
ODU Type III Installation
STEP 4 Mounting the Transceiver
1+0 Configuration
1+1/HSB Configuration
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 116/374
116 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
STEP 5 Mounting the Flexible Waveguide
1+0 Configuration
1+1/HSB Configuration
Mounting flange for flexible waveguide
Mounting flange for flexible waveguide
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 117/374
B4008 Rev. M 117
ODU Type III Installation
M10 Expansionbolts (type
dependant onthe nature of thewall
M10 Nuts and washers
3.6 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Wall
Ø10mm Pre-drilled holes
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 118/374
118 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
3.7 Mounting the ODU to the Antenna Assembly
Before mounting the ODU to the antenna assembly, it is necessary to
remove the protection lid from the antenna feed. See below.
First remove the nuts usinga 5,5mm wrench.
Then remove the set screwsusing a 1,5 mm allen key.
Protection lid
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 119/374
B4008 Rev. M 119
ODU Type III Installation
LATCHES (4ea, one
in each corner)
After adjustment;
M16 torque = 110-120Nm
For adjustment seeChapter 6.0.
To unlock the latches,
push this handle forward
For correct
polarisation;
see next
page
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 120/374
120 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Polarization
The electrical field is always orthogonal to the two opposing sides of the
two broad sides of the rectangular waveguide.
It is important to mount the ODU to the antenna with the right orientation.
The arrows on the ODU's handle shall indicate the polarisation (vertical or
horizontal).
P O L A RI Z AT I O N
P O L A RI Z AT I O N
POLARIZATION POLARIZATION
UP
DOWNWaveguide feed with
horizontal polarisation
Waveguide feed with
vertical polarisation
ODU orientation for
vertical polarisationODU orientation for
horizontal polarisation
UP
DOWN
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 121/374
B4008 Rev. M 121
ODU Type III Installation
Bracket
Loosen this nut one turn.
(See also Chapter 6.0)
Rotate the bracket 1800 by
turning this bolt CW.
4.0 ODU / Antenna Installation,
HSB and 2+0 Equipment
4.1 Preparing the Suspension for HSB and 2+0 Mounting
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 122/374
122 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4ea M8 Nuts and washers
4.2 Mounting the Antenna to the Supension
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 123/374
B4008 Rev. M 123
ODU Type III Installation
4.3 Mounting the Hybrid Frame to the Antenna
STEP 1
Note! Mounting sequence is important!
2ea M8 Set screws, nuts,washers and lock washers
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 124/374
124 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
M8 Screws,nuts and washers
STEP 2
Note! Mounting sequence is important!
M8 Screws,nuts and washers
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 125/374
B4008 Rev. M 125
ODU Type III Installation
4.3 Mounting the CityLink III ODUs to the Antenna Assembly
LATCHES (1 in eachcorner of each ODU)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 126/374
126 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.4 Mounting the Transceiver
(without Antenna) to the Column
Please refer to Chapter 3.5 (this Section).
4.5 Mounting the Suspension/Antenna to a Wall
Please refer to Chapter 3.6 (this Section).
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 127/374
B4008 Rev. M 127
ODU Type III Installation
5.0 Cable Connections
ODU BOTTOM VIEW:
Pressure equalizer
AGC Connector.In a 1+1 configuation,this connector is usedfor interconnectionbetween the two ODUs.
Ground connection. Attachgrounding cable (10mm2) tothis point with the M6 nut andwashers.
IDU - ODU Cable Connector, N-50WFor details please see Figure V-7.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 128/374
128 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
6.0 Antenna Alignment
Azimuth Adjustment
• Unlock securing nut approx. 1 turnbefore azimuth adjusting
• Adjust azimuth
• Lock securing nut after adjustment
Elevation Adjustment
• Unlock securing nut approx. 1/2 turnbefore elevation adjusting
• Adjust elevation
• Lock securing nut after adjustment
6.1 Azimuth and Elevation Adjustment
Torque: 110-120Nm
Torque: 110-120Nm
6.2 Coarse adjustment.Adjust both antennas to correct direction as possible by using magnetic
compass or optical sight.
6.3 Fine adjustment
Fine adjustment is achieved by setting up a connection between the
antennas. When the connection is established a readout of the AGC voltage
can be used to align the antennas. Loosen the antenna in both elevation and
azimuth according to figure and adjust both azimuth and elevation untilmaximum signal is recived. Try a few times in each direction. The antenna
should be turned so much that the first sidelobes are seen, thereby ensure
that the antenna is aligned on the mainlobe.
When the antenna is aligned in both azimuth and elevation the polarization
of the feed shall be realigned.
Finally ensure that all bolts and nuts are properly mounted and tighten.
The same procedure shall than be repeated on the opposite antenna.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 129/374
B4008 Rev. M 129
ODU Type III Installation
6.5 Polarisation alignment
Align the antenna approximately in both elevation and azimuth. Then use
a water level to align the polarisation of the antenna feed to correct
polarisation according to figures below. Loosen the six M8 nuts that are
securing the feed to the reflector and rotate the feed according to readout
of the water level. When the feed is in correct alignment, tighten the six
M8 nuts properly (do not overtight the nuts). Then the ODU can bemounted and the antenna has to be aligned. If the antenna has to be rotated
several degrees in azimuth or elevation, the polarisation has to be rea-
ligned according to prior procedures.
Use these stud screws for aligning the feed with water level.
When the H mark is in upwards position, this
shows that the antenna is Horizontal Polarized
Water level
Horizontal Polarisation:
6.4 Final Control
When all adjustments are performed, check that the input level agrees with
the calculated level. If the input level is to low, realign the antenna once
more. Finally ensure that all bolts and nuts are properly mounted and
tighten.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 130/374
130 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Use these stud screws for aligning the feed with water level.
When the V mark is in upwards position, this
showes that the antenna are Vertical Polarised
Water level
Vertical Polarisation:
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 131/374
B4008 Rev. M 131
IDU Installation
SECTION V V V V V
IDU Installation
ODU-48VDC
64kb/sG.703
2Mb/sWayside
SVCEExt.1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt. 2
10BaseTLAN
IDU - HSB INTFCCALL ALM & AU X LCT
NI 2
NI1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER
155Mb/s LINE
PWR INP
G.703
OUT
-48VDC
64kb/sG.703
2Mb/sWayside
SVCEExt. 1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt.2
10BaseTLAN
IDU-HSBINTFCC ALL A LM & AUX LCT
NI2
NI 1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER 2
155 Mb/s LINE
PWRINP
G.703
OUT1
2
RXDIRA
RXDIRB
TXDIRATXDIRB
POWER 1
ODU-48VDC
64kb/sG.703
2Mb/sWayside
SVCEExt.1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt. 2
10BaseTLAN
IDU- HSB INTFCCALL ALM& AUX LCT
NI2
NI 1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER
155Mb/sLINE
PWR
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 132/374
132 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
1.0 GeneralThis section assumes that pre-planning of the link has been performed, i.e.
path budgeting & survey to ensure good line-of sight between the two link
ends.
1.1 Packing
Any sensitive product, i.e. IDU and Printed Circuit Boards, are packed in
special antistatic handling bags or boxes.
It is therefore essential that whenever unpacking or disassembling the
equipment and or handling printed circuit boards etc., special precautions
to avoid ESD (Electro Static Discharge) should be taken, such as using
wrist grounding or corresponding protection.
The equipment is packed in sealed plastic bags which are equipped with
required moisture protection.
All equipment is further packed in special designed cases prepared for
transportation.
Dimensions and weight of each case are specified in the "Packing
specifications" issued for the respective shipment.
1.2 Marking
Marking is done according to customers requirements. If such informa-
tion is unavailable, the equipment is marked in the following way:
Customer address
Contract No.
Site Name (if known)Case No.
1.3 Transportation
The transport containers are prepared for shipment by air, truck, railway
and sea, suitable for handling by fork-lift trucks and slings.
The cargo must be kept dry during transport and storage.
For sea-transport, deck-side shipment is not permitted and carrier-ownedcargo containers should be used.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 133/374
B4008 Rev. M 133
IDU Installation
1.4 Radio Equipment Inventory Check
Look for damage on the cases. Ensure that correct quantities of goods have
arrived, according to the packing list in each package/unit.
Check also that the part description on the outside of each box corre-
sponds to the components required for the installation, i.e. correct antennaand frequency, ODU frequency band and sub-band, IDU configuration.
Report any damages or missing items to Nera ASA by e-mail or fax. A short
description of damages, preferably including photographs, should be sent
as soon as possible.
1.5 Preparation for Installation
Complete the required civil works. Transport all the equipment to site.Unpack the equipment and inspect for damage during transit to site and
make sure that the correct quantities of goods have arrived.
Units with static discharge protection should not be unpacked until the
equipment installation takes place. Ensure you are grounded at a control-
led ESD point before and during insertion, and during any subsequent
unpacking of the unit.
1.6 Handling & Storage
It is recommended that components are stored and transported to the
installation site in their original packing cases. If items are unpacked for
storage, they should be handled with care and protected during transpor-
tation by similar protective materials.
The equipment is an electronic device which should be handled with care.
It should be stored in dry, cool conditions, out of direct sunlight. A
moisture absorbing bag is taped inside the transportation unit to minimisecondensation during transportation. This is to be removed at installation.
No maintenance is required when stored according to particulars above.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 134/374
134 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Figure V-2 Mounting the IDU in a Rack
Figure V-1 Mounting the Mechanical Adapters for ANSI or ETSI Rack
ODU-48VDC
64kb/sG.703
2Mb/sWayside
SVCEExt. 1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt. 2
10BaseTLAN
IDU - HSBINTFCCALL ALM & AUX LCT
NI 2
NI 1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER
155 Mb/s LINE
PWR INP
G.703
OUT
-48VDC
64kb/sG.703
2Mb/sWayside
SVCEExt. 1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt. 2
10BaseTLAN
IDU-HSBINTFCCALL ALM &AUX LCT
NI 2
NI 1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER2
155 Mb/sLINE
PWRINP
G.703
OUT1
2
RXDIRA
RXDIRB
TXDIRATXDIRB
POWER1
ODU-48VDC
64kb/sG.703
2Mb/sWayside
SVCEExt. 1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt.2
10BaseTLAN
IDU- HSBINTFCCALL ALM & AUX LCT
NI2
NI 1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER
155 Mb/sLINE
PWR
ETSI Rack Adapter
M6x12
WASHERFLAT WASHER
ANSI Rack Adapter
2.0 IDU Installation
2.1. Mounting the IDU in an ANSI (19") or an ETSI Rack
Mount the relevant mechanical adapters provided in the IDU package by
using the M3-6mm TORX screws also provided in the IDU package. The
long adapters are for ETSI Rack, while the short are for ANSI Rack. SeeFigure V-1.
Position the IDU in the rack and secure it by using the four M6-12mm
screws provided in the IDU package. See Figure V-2.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 135/374
B4008 Rev. M 135
IDU Installation
2.2 Cable Installation
Route, secure if necessary with cable ties, and terminate ground cable
between the IDU safety ground post and a nearby local safety ground
point. Use the 6mm2 cable (2.5m long) included in the grounding kit.
Refer to Figures X-1 and X-2 (Section X, Appendix 1) for the IDU
safety ground post location.
Route, secure if necessary with cable ties, the terminated IDU/ODU
cable and connect to the ODU port of the IDU. See Chapter 5.0 (this
Section) for further details.
NOTE!
Max torque = 5Nm when mounting the IDU/ODU cable.
Route and secure the power cable. The CityLink requires DC power
(-40,5 to -57V) via a 2-pin connector. Refer to Figure X-7 (Section
X, Appendix 1) for a pinout of the connectors. It is recommended to
use the supplied power cable, UWMK5051. The cable is left un-
connected in one end. The black conductor must be connected to 0V
(station gnd) and the blue conductor must be connected to -48V. After
connecting the cable to the power supply, measure polarity on power
connector terminals.
Dependent on the purchased configuration of the IDU, route and attach
all cables except the power cable. Refer to Section X, Appendix 1 for
wiring details.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 136/374
136 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Figure V-4 Mounting the Hot Standby IDUs in an ETSI Rack
3.0 Hot Standby IDU Installation(2+0 IDU installation is similar to ordinary IDU installation, see Ch. 2.0)
3.1 Mounting the Hot Standby IDUs in a Rack
Mount the relevant mechanical adapters provided in the IDU package byusing the M3-6mm TORX screws also provided in the IDU package.See
Figure V-1 (Chapter 2.1).
Position the IDUs in the rack and secure them by using the four M6-12mm
screws provided in each IDU package. See Figures V-3 & V-4.
Figure V-3 Mounting the Hot Standby IDUs in an ANSI Rack
ODU-48VDC
64kb/sG.703
2Mb/sWayside
SVCEExt. 1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt.2
10BaseTLAN
IDU-HSB INTFCCALL ALM & AUX LCT
NI 2
NI 1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER
155 Mb/s LINE
PWR INP
G.703
OUT
-48VDC
64kb/sG.703
2Mb/sWayside
SVCEExt.1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt. 2
10BaseTLAN
IDU-HSB INTFCCALL ALM &AUX LCT
NI2
NI 1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER2
155 Mb/s LINE
PWRINP
G.703
OUT1
2
RXDIRA
RXDIRB
TXDIRATXDIRB
POWER1
ODU-48VDC
64kb/sG.703
2Mb/sWayside
SVCEExt. 1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt. 2
10BaseTLAN
IDU -HSB INTFCCALL ALM & AUX LCT
NI 2
NI 1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER
155 Mb/s LINE
PWR
ODU-48VDC
64kb/sG.703
2Mb/sWayside
SVCEExt. 1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt.2
10BaseTLAN
IDU -HSB INTFCCALL ALM & AUX LCT
NI 2
NI 1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER
155 Mb/s LINE
PWR INP
G.703
OUT
-48VDC
64kb/sG.703
2Mb/sWayside
SVCEExt.1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt. 2
10BaseTLAN
IDU -HSB INTFCCALL ALM & AUX LCT
NI2
NI 1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER 2
155 Mb/s LINE
PWRINP
G.703
OUT1
2
RXDIRA
RXDIRB
TXDIRATXDIRB
POWER 1
ODU-48VDC
64kb/s
G.703
2Mb/s
Wayside
SVCE
Ext. 1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt. 2
10BaseTLAN
IDU - HSB INTFCCALL ALM & AUX LCT
NI 2
NI 1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER
155 Mb/s LINE
PWR INP
G.703
OUT
-48VDC
64kb/s
G.703
2Mb/s
Wayside
SVCE
Ext. 1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt. 2
10BaseTLAN
IDU - HSB INTFCCALL ALM & AUX LCT
NI 2
NI1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER 2
155 Mb/sLINE
PWRINP
G.703
OUT1
2
RXDIRA
RXDIRB
TXDIRATXDIRB
POWER 1
ODU-48VDC
64kb/s
G.703
2Mb/s
Wayside
SVCE
Ext. 1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt.2
10BaseTLAN
IDU- HSB INTFCCALL ALM & AUX LCT
NI2
NI 1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER
155 Mb/s LINE
PWR
ODU-48VDC
64kb/sG.703
2Mb/sWayside
SVCEExt. 1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt. 2
10BaseTLAN
IDU - HSB INTFCCALL ALM & AUX LCT
NI 2
NI 1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER
155 Mb/s LINE
PWR
ODU-48VDC
64kb/sG.703
2Mb/sWayside
SVCEExt. 1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt. 2
10BaseTLAN
IDU - HSB INTFCCALL ALM & AUX LCT
NI 2
NI 1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER
155 Mb/s LINE
PWR
ODU
-48VDC
64kb/sG.703
2Mb/sWayside
SVCEExt. 1
Phone
64kb/s
V.11
2MHz
Sync.
SVCE
Ext. 2
10BaseT
LAN
IDU - HSB INTFC
CALL ALM & AUX LCT
NI 2
NI 1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER
155 Mb/s LINE
PWR
-48VDC
64kb/sG.703
2Mb/sWayside
SVCEExt. 1
Phone
64kb/sV.11
2MHzSync.
SVCEExt. 2
10BaseTLAN
IDU-HSB INTFCCALL ALM & AUX LCT
NI 2
NI 1
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
POWER2
155Mb/sLINE
PWRINP
G.703
OUT1
2
RXDIRA
RXDIRB
TXDIRATXDIRB
POWER1
IDU A
IDU B
HSB-IDU
M6x12WASHER
FLAT WASHER
IDU A HSB-IDU
IDU B
M6x12
WASHERFLAT WASHER
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 137/374
B4008 Rev. M 137
IDU Installation
3.2 Interconnections in a Hot Standby System
Interconnections between the IDUs in a Hot Standby system are done by
means of a Y-cable. The cabel connectors are marked respectively IDU A,
HSB-IDU and IDU B and this indicates which IDU they shall be connected
to. See Figure V-5.
Figure V-5 Interconnections in a Hot Standby System
IDU A
IDU B
HSB IDU
Y-Cable
WARNING!
If the Y-cable connectors marked with IDU A and IDU B areswapped, the IDUs must always be rebooted after this opera-
tion.
NOTE!
Max torque = 5Nm when mounting the IDU/ODU cable.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 138/374
138 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.0 Installation of Optional Extension Boards
Step 1
Remove the four screws that holds the lid
Step 2
Use a flat screwdriver to carefully remove the lid.
WARNING!
This equipment contains components which are sensitive to "ESD"
(Electro Static Discharge). It is therefore essential that whenever
disassembling the equipment and/or handling PC boards, special pre-cautions to avoid ESD have to be made.
This includes personnel grounding, grounding of work bench,
grounding of tools and instruments.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 139/374
B4008 Rev. M 139
IDU Installation
Step 3
Remove screws and bushings (2ea) from the spacers and also the three
screws from the IDU front as shown below.
Step 4
Remove the blindplates from the front of the IDU.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 140/374
140 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Step 6
Mount the new front using the three screws removed in Step 4 (only two
screws for the 21x2Mbit/s Extension Board).
Step 7
Remount the lid.
Step 5
Mount the extension board. Press the extension board towards the IDU's
front and push the rear edge downwards until you are able to mount the
screws and bushings in the spacers.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 141/374
B4008 Rev. M 141
IDU Installation
5.0 IDU/ODU Cable InstallationBoth ends of the cable must be terminated with N-male connectors. We
recommend to use cables with outer conductor of solid corrugated
copper.
For other cable types, the cable and all necessary installation materials must
be arranged by the purchaser.
Cable length limitations are dependent upon cable type used. The table
below show limtations for some cables. Cable lenghts include cable ties.See
Table V-1.
Table V-1 Cable length limitation due to different DC resistance
Table V-2 Selected Coax Cables and Connector Kits
Cable Type
DCresistance R
If the length is 100 m minimum voltage to
IDU must be
If the length is 200 m minimum voltage to
IDU must be
If the length is 300 m minimum voltage to
IDU must be
Bendingradius
90 m (-40.5 V)*
100 m (-40.7 V) Dev. 0.2V200 m (-43.5 V)
FSJ1-50A
See Note 1
16.3 Ω/km
300 m (-46.0 V)
25 mm
180 m (-40.5 V)*200 m (- 40.8 V) Deviation 0.3 V LDF1-50
See Note 2 8,48 Ω/km
300 m (- 42.5 V)
75 mm
160 m (-40.5 V)*200 m (-41.1 V) Deviation 0.6 VLCF14-50J
See Note 3 9.6 Ω/km
300 m (-42.9 V)
40 / 120 mmsingle / rptd
LCF38-50JSee Note 4
5.0 Ω/km 50 / 95 mmsingle / rptd
*) Standard (ETSI) specified minimum supply voltage to IDU is –40,5 V
IDU to ODU Coax Cable
1 Cable Kit 100 m LCF14-50 100 m ¼” Coax Cable including 200 Cable Ties 85W5147-1002 Cable Kit 150 m LCF14-50 150 m ¼” Coax Cable including 300 Cable Ties 85W5147-1503 Cable Kit 200 m LCF14-50 200 m ¼” Coax Cable including 400 Cable Ties 85W5147-2004 N-Connector Kit Connectors for IDU & ODU and Cable Grounding 87K5148-N5 Preparation Tool for LCF14 Easy cable preparation for connector attachment 85W5147-TL
For cable run 200 –300 m:6 Cable & Connector Kit
300 m LCF38-50300 m 3/8” Coax Cable including 600 Cable Tiesand Connectors for ODU & IDU including jumpercable and Cable Grounding Kit
85W5011-K300
7 Extra Connector Kit Connectors for ODU & IDU including jumper cableand Cable Grounding Kit
87K5013-1A
8 Preparation Tool for LCF38 Easy cable preparation for connector attachment 85W5011-TL
Notes:1. Not selected as standard stock item.
2. Standard cable kits are available as 100 m and 200 m
3. Standard cable kits are available as 100 m, 150 m and 200 m
4. Standard cable kits are available as 250 m and 300 m. Standard version of
LCF38-50 (6.7Ω/km) cannot be used. Only the cable type LCF38-50 with solid
copper inner conductor must be used (RFS part no. 152 225 11).
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 142/374
142 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
• Avoid excessive bending. Run the cable where it is reasonable well
protected and will not rub against sharp edges or overly abrasive
surfaces.
• The N-connectors should be tightened to the IDU and ODU according
to the manufacturers installation instructions (provided with the
connectors) but with a max torque of 5Nm on the IDU.• Leave enough slack in the cable termination to the ODU to allow
antenna re-positioning.
• The cable connection to the ODU should be made weatherproof
using the cable connector weatherproof sleeve provided in the
installation kit. See Figure V-7.
See Figure V-6 for Cable Arrangement.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 143/374
B4008 Rev. M 143
IDU Installation
Figure V-6 Cable Arrangement, Mandatory Items
Item Description Part No. Remarks1 Coax Cable
1a Cable Tie
See Table V-1,
-2a & -2b
Supplied as Cable Kit,
cable with ties (2 per m).
2a Connector, N-male, straight for ODU
2b Connector, N-male, angle for IDU
2c Grounding Kit for coax cable
See Table V-
2a & -2b
Supplied as Connector Kit.
3a Grounding Cable for ODU
3b Grounding Cable for IDU
3c Grounding Jumper Cable IDU/SW
UWA7 Supplied as separate kit UWA7.
4 DC Power Supply Cable UWMK5051 Included in IDU connection kit and HSB
IDU interconnection kit.
NOTE 1Weather protec-tion kit ABZ278(See Figure V-7)
Grounding point. (See Figure V-8)
ODU
Antenna
EquipmentEarthing Bar
Buried Earthing Network
IDU B
IDU A
3a
4
1
1
3b
3c
2b
2a
Tower Structure
2c
1a
HSB-IDU
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 144/374
144 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Figure V-7 Coax Cable Connection
CABLE CONNECTION
OUTDOOR UNIT ODU
BOTTOM OFBRANCHING UNIT
PROTECTIONSLEEVE97E12A-1
N - CONNECTOR
SEALING75N06D-1
HOSE CLAMP97Z6A-5
BOTTOM OFBRANCHING UNIT
PROTECTIONSLEEVE
N - CONNECTORfemale, chassis
N - CONNECTORmale, cable
HOSE CLAMP
APPLY SEALINGCOMPOUND HERE
(NOTE 1)
1. Slide the Protection Sleeve and the Hose Clamp over the connector and onto the cable.
2. Connect the cable to the ODU. Press the protection sleeve over the connector and tighten the
connector by hand (using the sleeve gives a good hand-grip when tightening).
3. Pull the protection sleeve backwards and apply Sealing Compound (Plast 2000) onto the top end of
the sleeve. Press the sleeve upwards and over the connector until it stops into the groove around the
ODU connector‘s nut and washer.
4. Adjust the clamp diameter with a screwdriver and slide in the clamp between the sleeve and the
ODU‘s cooling ribs and place it over the connector head.Tighten the clamp with a screwdriver.
NOTE: ALL CODED ITEMS AREINCLUDED IN KIT ABZ278
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 145/374
B4008 Rev. M 145
IDU Installation
Figure V-8 Branching Unit Grounding Point
Attach grounding cable (10mm2) to this
point with the M8 nut and washers.
Figure V-9 Hot Standby and
2+0 DF-SP Branching Unit Grounding Point
Attach grounding cable (10mm2) to this
point with the M6 nut and washers.
WARNING!
Do not use the Branching Unit's sealing screws for groundingpurpose.
WARNING!
Do not use the Branching Unit's sealing screw for grounding
purpose.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 146/374
146 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
This page is intentionally left blank.
6.0 Change of Fan-Cassette
Fan cassette (if equipped) is located on the right hand side of the IDU. The
cassette may be replaced on live unit, without traffic interrupt. Withdraw old
cassette by pulling on knob on front of unit and replace with new unit.
Some combinations of circuit boards requires the use of fan-cassette in order
to control heat. In case a fan-cassette is to be installed in a unit not previously
having one, a blind front cover will have to be unscrewed and discarded
before installing a new cassette.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 147/374
B4008 Rev. M 147
Preparations for Operation
Preparations
for Operation
SECTION VI
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 148/374
148 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
1.0 General
This section assumes that the radio terminal has been installed according
to the guidelines in Sections II - V.
1.1 Equipment required• Voltmeter for AGC voltage monitoring (with cable to connect to
BNC-connector)
• Cable for connection between AGC monitoring point and voltmeter.
1.2 Connections
See Appendix I for a more detailed description of connectors.
Verify the following:• Correct line interface plug-in board is installed.
• Cable for main traffic is connected.
• Connection of IDU safety ground. Use min. 10 mm2 cable.
• Coaxial cable between IDU and ODU is connected.
• Cable between IDU and the PC running the configuration & set-up
program is connected. NOTE: RJ-45 modular plugs used on patch
cables etc. must mechanically comply with Federal Communications
Commission - Part 68 (FCC-68).
Optionally the following connections may be used:
• ALM/AUX connector for parallel alarm inputs and outputs.
• 2x64kbit/s connector for 64kbit/s serial channels utilising bytes in
the Section Overhead.
• NI-1 and/or NI-2 connectors for interface to other Nera equipment.
• 2Mbit/s WAYSIDE connectors for interface to 2Mbit/s wayside
traffic channel utilising bytes in the Section Overhead.
• 2MHz SYNC connectors for synchronisation purposes.• Handset and extension connectors.
• LAN Interface connectors.
2.0 Power onApply power to the IDU by connecting the power cable. The radio link
start-up procedure and self-diagnostics will start to execute.
When power is applied to the IDU the system will perform self test, this
will take a few seconds.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 149/374
B4008 Rev. M 149
Preparations for Operation
2.1 NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator Startup and
connecting to Network Elements
The NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator (Nera Element vieW-Network Man-
agement System/ -Configurator) program must be installed on a PC
satisfying the following minimum requirements:
• NT4.0/Win95/Win98 operating system
• Pentium 133MHz processor
• 32MB memory
• 200MB disk size
• 1 COM port
• CD-ROM drive
Follow carefully the program installation instructions to make sure the
program is successfully installed.
The element viewer can monitor the Network Elements (NEs) using a
serial connection (RS-232) or a TCP/IP connection (or both for different
network elements). Apply all external connections to the PC before the program is started.
A serial connection must be used the first time the network manager/
configurator is connected to the CityLink, because the IP address must be
set in the CityLink, before a TCP/IP connection can be established.
2.1.1 Starting NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator with
Serial Connection (RS-232/ LCT).
Apply the serial cable to one of the serial ports of the PC and the LCT port
of the CityLink. Start the program. A Log on dialog box pops up. Log on
to the network with your user id and password.
Note!NEW-NMS' security system has initially one user account:
User ID: adminPassword: adminpasswd
It is strongly recommended to change this password!
The program has an auto discover function which automatically discovers
NEs connected to the serial ports of the PC when starting. If some NEs are
connected to the serial ports of the PC, the network topology is automat-ically discovered and presented in the Explorer view. Press Add to include
discovered elements in the network topology of the program. The auto
discover function can also be manually executed by selecting Discover
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 150/374
150 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
from the File menu. When discovering the network manually, the program
looks for NEs at the open ports listed in the Communication dialog box
(select Communication from the Configuration menu).
2.1.2 Starting NEW-NMS/NEW-Configurator with
TCP/IP Connection.
(Assumes the TCP/IP address is configured in the CityLink )
Apply Ethernet connections to both the CityLink and PC. Start the
program. A Log on dialog box pops up. Log on to the network with your
user id and password.
Note!
NEW-NMS' security system has initially one user account:
User ID: adminPassword: adminpasswdIt is strongly recommended to change this password!
The program does not know the IP-address of the network element so the
connection must be manually established. To configure a TCP/IP connec-
tion to the network element, select Communication from the Configu-
ration menu. Press the Add button and type the IP address of the NE in
the address field of the dialog box which pops up. Press OK to save the
changes, and OK to close the Communication Configuration dialog box.Select Discover from the File menu. Press Add to include discovered
elements in the network topology of the program. The accepted network
elements will be discovered and presented in the Explorer view.
2.2 Initial configuration
When the program has established contact with the CityLink, some
configurations must be set before antenna alignment can be performed.
A Configuration Wizard will guide you through the initial configurations.
Start the Wizard by selecting the network element in the Explorer view.
Then select Configuration > Wizard from the right mousebutton context
menu. Follow the Wizard instructions.
All the configuration settings are described in Section VII; Configuration.
You are now ready to proceed with antenna alignment. Please refer to
Section IV Chapter 6.0 (ODU Type I & III) or the installation manual for the actual antenna (ODU Type II)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 151/374
B4008 Rev. M 151
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Configuration byNEW Configurator
SECTION VII
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 152/374
152 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
1.0 GeneralThis section assumes that the Preparations for Operation described in
Section VI has been performed for the complete radio link hop.
Configuration of the Network Elements is done from the Explorer Viewwhich can be launched by selecting Explore Net from the View menu.
Configuration of Network Elements is achieved using a set of property-
sheets. The property-sheets are modeless, so configuration of several
different modules can be displayed simultaneously.
To open the configuration property-sheets:
Press the Right mouse-button on the Network Element node/leaf you
want to view/change the current configurations. A dynamic menu pops up.Open the Configuration sub-menu and select the configuration-specific
menu item.
The configuration property sheets can also be launched by selecting/
marking an NE node/leaf in the Explorer View and then selecting the
configuration-specific menu item under the Edit sub menu in the Config-
uration menu.
The property-sheets are divided into two categories by means of function-ality:
Configuration Property sheets with Multiple Settings:
The program retrieves the current settings from the NE when the property-
sheet is opened. No message is sent to the element and no data is modified
in NEW’s data structure before the user presses one of the property-sheet
buttons:
Figure VII-1 Buttons on Configuration property sheets with
multiple settings
Buttons:
Get: Retrieves the current settings from the NE.
Set: Sends the current settings to the NE.Close: Closes the property-sheet without saving or setting any data
Help: Displays help for the active property-page.
.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 153/374
B4008 Rev. M 153
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
••••• To change the settings:
1 Get the current settings from the NE by pressing Get.
The current NE settings are automatically retrieved when the property-
sheet is opened.
2 Alter the settings.
3 Press Set to send the changes to the NE.
Configuration Property sheets with Single Interactive Settings:
The program retrieves the current NE settings when the property-sheet is
opened. Has no Get, Set or Save buttons; All functional buttons are placed
in the property-pages. A message is sent to the Network Element imme-
diately when a control is changed or a button is pressed.
Property-sheet buttons:
Figure VII-2 Buttons on Configuration property sheets with
single interactive settings
Buttons:
Close:Closes the property-sheet.Help: Displays help for the active property-page.
Figure VII-3 Configuration property sheet information field
All property-pages have an information field at the bottom reflecting the
current status of the data shown in the property-page and the date and time
the property sheet data was retrieved from the network element.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 154/374
154 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
2.0 Element Node
2.1 Element Id
The CityLink Element Id property sheet shows some main information
about the Network Element like name, type, serial number and different
addresses. The fields with white background can be altered by users with proper user privileges. The gray fields are non editable.
The Element Id configuration sheet can be opened from the Configura-
tion context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Element Id from the Configura-
tion menu.
Figure VII-4 Element ID Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 155/374
B4008 Rev. M 155
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Fields: Description:
Serial number: The serial number of the NE. (Not editable)
NE type: The type of NE. (Not editable)
Name: The name of the NE (max. 32 characters)
Section address: The section address of the NE. (1-254)NE address: The NE address (1-128). Used for identification of
NEs within a section.
MAC address: The Media Access Control address of the NE.
Used for OSI-Management. (Not editable)
NSAP address: The Network Service Access Point address of the NE.
Used for OSI-Management.
IP address The Internet Protocol address of the NE.
Hot standby: This field is checked if the NE is a hot standby element.
To change the settings:
1 First, get the current settings from the NE by pressing Get.
(The settings are automatically retrieved from the NE when the
property-sheet is opened.)
2 Alter the settings you want to change.
3 Press Set to send the changes to the NE.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 156/374
156 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
2.2 Available Functions
The available functions property sheet shows the functions available at the
network element. All these functions are additional CityLink functions.
The user has paid extra to get these functions. Contact your Nera equip-
ment supplier to order functions. You will get an encrypted authentication
string in return.
The Available Functions configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view.
The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element
node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Available Functions
from the Configuration menu.
Figure VII-5 Available Functions Configuration Sheet
Fields: Description:
Automatic transmitted ATPC is a function for effectively reducing
power control (ATPC) interference probabilities..
IP stack The NE has an integrated IP stack. Synchronous equipment Synchronous equipment timing source is
timing source (SETS) available.
Simple network management An SNMP management agent is available.
protocol (SNMP)
64 Kbit/s channels Two 64 Kbit/s channels can be inserted into
the STM-1 Section Overhead (SOH ).
2 Mbit/s wayside channel One 2Mbit/s wayside channel can be inserted
into the STM-1 Section Overhead (SOH ).
Alarm auxiliary function A unit containing an auxiliary alarm unitand an auxiliary output unit is available.
STM-1
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 157/374
B4008 Rev. M 157
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
2.3 Notifications
The NE can send notifications to NEW when specific events occur. When
using notifications, NEW gets new information faster than if only polling
is used. Polling should however be used in addition to notifications. The
NE keeps individual notification settings for each NEW that is logged on
to the NE, such that the settings made from one NEW only apply to that NEW. Note that the settings will be reset to default when NEW logs on to
the NE or when the IDU is reset.
A notification is enabled when the corresponding checkbox is checked ( ).
The Notifications configuration sheet can be opened from the Configu-
ration context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Notifications from the Config-
uration menu.
Figure VII-6 Notifications Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 158/374
158 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Choices: Description:
Event s
Alarm When checked, Alarm notifications will be
sent from the NE to the program.
Security When checked, Security notifications will be sent from the NE to the program.
Switching When checked, Switching notifications will
be sent from the NE to the program.
Alarm (When the Alarm Events is disabled,
severity these functions are inactive)
Critical When checked, Alarm notifications will be
sent from the NE to the program if Critical
alarms occur.
Major When checked, Alarm notifications will be
sent from the NE to the program if Major
alarms occur.
Minor When checked, Alarm notifications will be
sent from the NE to the program if Minor
alarms occur.
Warning When checked, Alarm notifications will be
sent from the NE to the program if Warningsoccur.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 159/374
B4008 Rev. M 159
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
2.4 NE Clock Page
The NE Clock sheet lets you synchronize the Network Element Date/Time
with the NEW-NMS / PC Date/Time. (The NE Clock is set to the same
date/time as the PC Clock).
The NE Clock configuration sheet can be opened from the Configurationcontext menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit NE Clock from the Configura-
tion menu.
Fields: Description:The NE's Clock: The Date and Time retrieved from the
Network Element.
Difference from The difference between the PC clock and the
Network Element Clock.
Figure VII-7 NE Clock Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 160/374
160 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
2.5 Software Download
CityLink Application software can be downloaded through the NEW-NMS/
NEW-Configurator program.
The SW Download configuration can be started from the Configuration
context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet canalso be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit SW Download from the Config-
uration menu.
To download new NE application code:
1. The process of downloading starts with selecting the file containing
the application code. The file has extension: .bin. When a .bin-file is
selected, a dialog box will appear.
2. Verify that the correct version of the code file is chosen. Press Cancel
if wrong code file is chosen.
3. Press Start Download
4. Wait until the download is finished.
New application software is now downloaded at the NE. Now the NE must
start to use the new software. The new software will not start to execute
until it is activated. This is done from the SW Version property sheet.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 161/374
B4008 Rev. M 161
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
2.6 Software Versions
The SW versions property sheet shows the software revisions and their
status. The IDU contains two application code memory banks for both the
SU (IDU) and the Transceiver (ODU). Both the IDU and the ODU use
application code from one bank, while the other bank is available for SW
download. New software can be downloaded (see Chapter 2.5 SWDownload) in the unused bank while the IDU or ODU is executing the code
of the other bank. The user may also select which bank to execute the
application from if both banks contain valid software.
The ODU contains an application code software bank in addition to the two
banks in the IDU. The ODU software is copied from the active IDU bank
to the ODU bank during the ODU boot process.
The SW Versions configuration sheet can be opened from the Configu-ration context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit SW Versions from the Config-
uration menu.
Figure VII-8 SW Version Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 162/374
162 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Description:
SW Component Name of the software
Bank Software location
Revision Software revision
Status Idle:Software is not being executed.
Active:Software is being executed.
Loading: SW is downloading to this bank.
Invalid: Incomplete or invalid SW; SW bank
has not been used or a SW download has
failed.
Not contact with unit: The IDU does not
have contact with the unit containing this SW.
To activate a memory bank:1 Select the unused bank (status: Idle) by clicking the left mouse button.
2 Press the Set Active button
The NE will be reset and when it starts, the application code of the chosen
bank will be executed.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 163/374
B4008 Rev. M 163
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
3.0 Transmission Node
3.1 Transmission Configuration (Section Termination)
3.1.1 Section Termination, SW-version < R2A00
The CityLink Section Termination sheet shows the channel configurationof the network element. For CityLink systems, the number of the different
channel settings is fixed. Only the Channel Termination can be changed.
The Section Termination configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Transmission node in the Explorer
view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the
Transmission node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Section
Termination from theConfiguration menu.
Fields: Description:
Regular channels: The Number of Regular Channels.
Protection channels: The Number of Protection Channels.
Regular co. channels: The Number of Regular Co. Channels.
Protection co. channels: The Number of Protection Co. Channels.
Channels: List of NE Channels with the channel properties.Channel Name of the channel.
Termination MS (Multiplexer section) orRS (Regenerator Sec-
tion) (Double-click the field to edit).
The MS and RS are parts of the STM-1 Section
overhead. Together MS and RS form the total SOH.
Figure VII-9 Section Termination Configuration Sheet
To change the settings:
1. Get the current settings from the NE by pressing Get.
2. Alter the settings you want to change. To change the Termination
settings, double-click in the appropriate cell in the list. A Combo-box
where you can select RS or MS is then displayed
3. Press Set to send the changes to the NE.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 164/374
164 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
3.1.2 Transmission Configuration, SW-version ≥≥≥≥≥ R2A00
The Transmission Configuration sheet is used to set the transmission
standard and termination on the element. When the applied termination is
different from RST, the sheet is also used to configure the SETS functionality.
A CityLink element may support different extension boards. This includesthe DS3/E3 Extension Board, the STM-1 Extension Board or the 21x2Mbit/
s tributary board. Each element will, however, only support one extension
board at a time. From the Transmission Configuration sheet the user can
enable the functionality of the specific extension board. The 21x2Mbit/s
extension board assumes a frame structure which contains 63 E1s. To enable
this board, select the termination to be Lower Order Path Termination -
LOPT. If the DS3/E3 Extension Board or the STM-1 Extension Board is
mounted, the frame structure must be set explicitly.
The Transmission Configuration configuration sheet can be opened from
the Configuration context menu of the Transmission node in the Explorer
view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Trans-
mission node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Transmission
Configuration from theConfigurationmenu.
Figure VII-10 Section Termination Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 165/374
B4008 Rev. M 165
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Fields: Description:
Termination Enabling The type of termination this element shall
support. Legal values are:
• RST
• MST• Lower Order Path Termination - LOPT
• Enable X-Connect (available only if X-
Connect Extension Board is equipped)
• Enable DS3/E3 (available only if DS3/E3
Extension Board is equipped)
Note: If this setting is changed and applied to
the element, the equipment will perform a soft-
ware reset.
Transmission Standard The Transmission System used. Legal values are:
• SDH
• SONET
Element Type The type of «timing element» we’re supposed to
be. This is important in a network where SETS is
applied. Legal values are:
• SEC
• SSU Local (G.812 Local)
• SSU Transit (G812 Transit)
• PRC
SSU Clock Source This field will only be enabled whenever the
Element Type is set to either SSU (G.812
Local) or SSU (G.812 Transit). The SSU is an
external clock regenerator or filter that will remove jitter from
the clock on its input. It will then output a regenerated clock on itsoutput. The SSU is connected to the element via the
2MHz synch RJ-45 plug on the front of the IDU.
The clock source can be one of the following:
• LINE
• RADIO
• Any dropped 2Mbit/s
• LINE EXT
The last option will only be available if the X-
Connect Extension Board is present.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 166/374
166 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
SSU Squelch Level This field will only be enabled whenever the
Element Type is set to either SSU (G.812 Local) or
SSU (G.812 Transit). If the quality of the clock source
changes to a quality that is below this «quality
squelch» level, the 2MHz synch output to the SSU
will be squelched. This in turn will cause the SSU toenter holdover mode (or free-running), i.e. the clock
quality it sends to the 2MHz synch input will have a
G.812 quality (ref. ITU-T Recommendation G.812)
that is based upon the internal oscillator in the SSU.
Legal squelch levels are:
• Better or equal G.813
• Better or equal G.812 Local
• Better or equal G.812 Transit
• Equal G.811
Clock Priority This is the first column in theClock Priority list view.
This field will only be enabled whenever theElement
Type is set to SEC. This is just a number specifying
the priority of the rows where 1 is the higher priority.
The user can not change anything in this column.
Clock Source This is the second column in the Clock Priority list
view. This field will only be enabled whenever the
Element Type is set to SEC. If e.g. the user double
clicks the first cell in this column, a combobox will be
shown over the cell. The user can than select from
where the clock to this priority list item shall be taken.
This can also be done for the 2nd and 3rd cell in this
column. The 4th cell, on the other hand, is the internal
oscillator which will be used whenever the element is
in holdover mode. This cell can’t be altered. Legal
values are:
• LINE
• RADIO
• 2MHz Synch
• LINE EXT
Note: Only one of the priority list items can be
configured to take its clock source from a 2Mbit/s
tributary at the time. This is due to HW constraints.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 167/374
B4008 Rev. M 167
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Clock Quality This is the third column in the Clock Priority list view. This
field will only be enabled whenever theElement Type is set
to SEC. If the Clock Source field for a specific priority list
item is set to either STM-1 LINE or STM-1 RADIO, the
corresponding cell in this column will be set to SSM and
will be grayed out (i.e. disabled). This means that the contentof the S1-byte (located in the MSOH) will inform the element
of which clock quality the traffic in the specific directions is
clocked with. If theClock Source field for a specific priority
list item is set to be taken from the 2MHz Synch input, or it
is to be taken from a 2Mbit/s tributary, their clock quality
aren’t embedded in the traffic in any way. This means
that the user will have to set their clock qualities manually.
In these cases, the cell in question in this column will be
enabled and the user can set the quality. Legal values are:• G.813
• G.812 Local
• G.812 Transit
• G.811
In addition to these, SSM will also be present in the list but
can not be selected.
Note: Ref. ITU-T for more information regarding the
different G.8xx recommendations.
Enabled This is the fourth column in the Clock Priority list view.
This field will only be enabled whenever the Element Type
is set to SEC. If a specific priority list item has this cell
checked it will be present in the clock priority scheme. If
not it is ignored.
Active Priority This is the fifth column in theClock Priority list view. This
field presents the currently active clock. The field isupdated each time the “GET” button is pressed.
Note: If the user, by means of the Drop or Continue dialog, removes any of
the tributaries in the list above, they will automatically be removed from
the list!
Buttons:
SSM Dialog: This button will only be visible when the in user level of the
logged in user is equal to or greater than Administrator. It
will spawn a new dialog that will poll for the SSM in both
radio- and line direction of the STM-1 traffic.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 168/374
168 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Get: Click this button to retrieve the current settings from the
NE. Any modifications done to the GUI elements will be
lost and the «dirty» token will be removed.
Set: Click this button to send the settings to the NE. Any
modifications done to the GUI elements will be applied
the NE and the «dirty» token will be removed.Close: Click this button to close the property sheet.
Help: Press this button to get help on the current property sheet.
For help on an item, click at the top of the dialog box,
then click the item.
A brief description of the different terminations:
RST:
This is the default setting on the element when delivered from the factory.
With this configuration the SDH structure is ignored, i.e. it can be anything because the virtual containers will not be accessed. The equipment will
monitor and re-generate B1 pulses. M1 REI and B2 will only be monitored.
Figure VII-11 shows the Transmission Configuration dialog when this
setting is applied.
Note: When the element is RST, all the SETS elements of the dialog are
disabled. This is because SETS only is used when the element is configured
as MST or Lower Order Path Termination - LOPT. Even though the SETS
functionality is disabled, the user can see the last applied MST settings.
Figure VII-11 Transmission Configuration, RST
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 169/374
B4008 Rev. M 169
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Figure VII-12 Transmission Configuration, MST
MST:
With this configuration the SDH structure is ignored, i.e. it can be anything
because the virtual containers will not be accessed. The equipment will
monitor and regenerate B1-, M1 REI- and B2-pulses. Figure VII-12 shows
how the dialog looks when this setting is applied.
Figure VII-13 Transmission Configuration, LOPT
Lower Order Path Termination - LOPT:
With this configuration the SDH structure is assumed to have a VC-12mapping and the the equipment will monitor and regenerate B1, M1 REI, B2
and BIP-2 pulses.Figure VII-13shows how the dialog looks when this setting
is applied.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 170/374
170 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Enable X-Connect:
To enable the X-Connect functionality, select “Enable X-Connect” from the
“Termination enabling” combo box and press the “SET” button. The SDH
structure may be configured from the “Frame Structure” page.
Enable DS3/E3:
To enable the DS3/E3 functionality, select “Enable DS3/E3” from the“Termination enabling” combo box and press the “SET” button. The SDH
structure may be configured from the “Frame Structure” page.
Figure VII-14 Transmission Configuration, Enable X-Connect
Figure VII-15 Transmission Configuration, Enable DS3/E3
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 171/374
B4008 Rev. M 171
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Enable 21x2:
This functionality is only available with new target software. To enable the
21x2 functionality, select “Enable 21x2” from the “Termination enabling”
combo box and press the “SET” button. The SDH structure may be config-
ured from the “Frame Structure” page.
Figure VII-16 Transmission Configuration, Enable 21x2
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 172/374
172 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Description:
Direction From which STM-1 direction the S1 byte is monitored.
This can be either Line or Radio
Last change Will show the last time the specific S1 byte changed it’s
value.
S1 byte The current content of the specific S1 byte.Description A human readable interpretation of the S1 byte. These can
be:
3.1.3 SSM - Synchronization Status Message
The SSM sheet is used to monitor the received S1-byte in the two STM-
1 directions; LINE and RADIO.
The SSM - Synchronization Status Message configuration sheet can be
opened from the Section Termination sheet by clicking the SSM Dialog button on this sheet.
Note: The SSM Dialog button will only be visible for Administrator
users in the Section Termination sheet.
Figure VII-17The SSM Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 173/374
B4008 Rev. M 173
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
3.2 Alarm Indication Signal Insert
(For advanced users)
The Path Trace functionality and the AIS (Alarm Indicator Signal) function-ality are used for verifying that the received STM-1 frames are the frames we
want to receive (correct routing, frequency alignment...). This is done by
either inserting a fixed byte or a user defined ASCII string in the J0 slot in the
RSOH, or a two bit RF ID symbol at the transmit end. This is done from the
path trace sheet. The RF ID functionality is only available at the Radio side.
The radio that receives the STM-1 frames must have the same Trace string
(J0) or RF ID defined in the AIS insert sheet. If there is a mismatch, an AIS
can be inserted. An AIS can also be inserted if the HBER threshold is
exceeded.
The AIS Insert configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of both the Transmission Radio and Line Rx nodes in the
Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting)
one of the Transmission Radio and Line Rx nodes in the Explorer view
and then selecting Edit AIS Insert from the Configuration menu.
S1 byte SDH synchronization quality level description
0000 Quality unknown (existing sync network)
0001 Reserved
0010 G.811
0011 Reserved
0100 G.812 transit0101 Reserved
0110 Reserved
0111 Reserved
1000 G.812 local
1001 Reserved
1010 Reserved
1011 Synchronous equipment timing source (SETS)
1100 Reserved
1101 Reserved1110 Reserved
1111 Do not use for synchronization
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 174/374
174 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Subfields: Description:
Insert AIS when An AIS is inserted when the Viterbi HBER
Viterbi HBER threshold is exceeded. (See Chapter 4.4.9threshold exceeded for setting of BER threshold.)
Insert AIS when An AIS is inserted when there is a mismatch
trace mismatch between the Trace String set in the Path Trace
sheet and Trace String set on this sheet.
Insert AIS when An AIS is inserted when there is a mismatch
RF ID mismatch between the RF ID set in the Path Trace
sheet and RF ID bit set on this sheet.The RF ID functionality is only available at
the Radio node.
AIS remove delay 1 - 200 seconds
Regenerator
section
trace (J0) Not used The Regenerator Section Trace String is not
used.
Fixed byte The Regenerator Section Trace String is one
byte ( =8 bit) long.
Figure VII-18 AIS Insert Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 175/374
B4008 Rev. M 175
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Fields: Subfields: Description:
User message The Regenerator Section Trace String is a user de-
(ASCII) fined message ASCII (sixteen bytes =128bits long)
Expected: The ASCII string or fixed byte to be compared with
received J0 in RSOH. If mismatch, AIS will be
inserted if the Insert AIS when trace mismatch
box is checked. The Expected field normally con-
tains the same values as the Trace string in thePath
trace property sheet at the transmit end of the path.
Received: The ASCII string or fixed byte in received J0 in
RSOH.
Status: The status of the Regenerator Section Trace:
•
OK: Expected and received Regenerator Section Trace are identical.
• RS-TIM alarm: (Regenerator Section Trace
Identifier Mismatch) Mismath between
expected and received RS Trace.
• LOF error: Loss of frame alarm on received
STM-1 signal. Thus, J0 is not available. Alarm
status, OK or RS-TIM alarm will be latched.
• CRC error: CRC error in received Regenerator
Section Trace. (Only in User Message mode)• Invalid: Not valid User Message received.
RF ID: (The RF ID functionality is only available at the
Radio node)
Not used/Used: RF_ID MS3 bit on/off
Expected: The value to be compared with the RF ID byte in
the received SOH. If mismatch, AIS will be in-
serted if the Insert AIS when RF ID mismatch
box is checked. The Expected field normallycontains the same values as the RF ID value in the
Path Trace property sheet at the transmit end of
the path.
Received: The received RF ID value.
Status: The status of the RF ID:
• OK: Expected and received RF ID values are
identical.
• RF-ID alarm: Mismatch between expected and
received RF ID values.
• Invalid: Not valid RF ID value received.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 176/374
176 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Figure VII-19 Path Trace Configuration Sheet
3.3 Path Trace
(For advanced users)
The Path Trace functionality and the AIS (Alarm Indicator Signal) function-
ality are used to test that the received STM-1 frames are the frames we want
to receive (correct routing, frequency alignment. . . . ). This is done by either
inserting a fixed byte or an user defined ASCII sting in the J0 slot in the RSOH,or a two bit RF ID symbol at the transmit end. This is done from the path trace
sheet. The RF ID functionality is only available at the Radio side. The radio
that receives the STM-1 frames must have the same Trace string (J0) or RF
ID defined in the AIS insert sheet. If there is a mismatch, an AIS can be
inserted. An AIS can also be inserted if the HBER threshold is exceeded.
The Path Trace configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of both the Transmission Radio and Line Tx nodes in the
Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) theone of theTransmission Radio and Line Tx nodes in the Explorer view and
then selecting Edit Path Trace from the Configuration menu.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 177/374
B4008 Rev. M 177
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Fields: Subfields Description:
Regenerator section
trace string
Enabled When checked the specific Trace
String is sent in the J0 byte.
Fixed byte The Regenerator Section TraceString is one byte ( =8bit) long.
User message The Regenerator Section Trace
(ASCII) String is a user defined message
ASCII (sixteen bytes =128bits long)
Trace string Specifies the data (Fixed byte or
User Message) to be inserted into
the J0 byte.
RF ID
Not used/Used RF_ID MS3 bit on/off
Two bit combination.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 178/374
178 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.0 Equipment Node
4.1 Network Routing
The active and initial routing tables map incoming messages that are
addressed to other NEs, to different communication ports.
The active routing table is used by the IDU to route messages to other NEs,
using the best path detected. The IDU regularly searches for connected
NEs through all enabled communication ports to detect any changes in the
network topology. This table is initialised with the initial routing entries
when the IDU is rebooted (and when the initial routing table is configured
by the user) and then evolves towards an optimal routing table.
The initial routing table is used after the IDU has been booted. This table
is used as a starting point for the routing mechanism, and will thus, if
properly set, decrease the time the NE uses to create a sufficient active
routing table. Initial routing entries can be manually added and active
routing entries can be copied to the initial table.
The Routing Table configuration sheet can be opened from the Config-
uration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node
in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Routing Table from theConfiguration menu.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 179/374
B4008 Rev. M 179
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Figure VII-20Routing Table Configuration Sheet,
Active Tab (top) and Initial Tab (bottom)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 180/374
180 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Description:
Auto/Manual If Auto, the router may update the entry in the active
routing table automatically based on shortest path/
lowest weight. If Manual, the entry is never changed by
the router and fixed route configuration is used.
Section The Section number of the addressed NE (1-128).NE The NE address of the destination NE. If this number is
255, section routing is used. That means that this routing
entry is used for all NEs in the specified section.
Possible values: 1...62 (and broadcast address 255).
Port The communication port of which the messages are to be
routed through. Possible values:
• NI1
• NI2
• DCC Line
• DCC Radio
• OSI TP4 tunnel 1 (Server)
• OSI TP4 tunnel 2 (Server)
• OSI TP4 tunnel 1 (Client)
• OSI TP4 tunnel 2 (Client)
• TCP/IP tunnel 1 (Server)
• TCP/IP tunnel 2 (Server)
• TCP/IP tunnel 1 (Client)• TCP/IP tunnel 2 (Client)
Weight A computed weight that gives an indication of the
communication capacity to the destination network
element. A high number denotes a longer response time.
Buttons:
Add: Displays the Add Routing Entry dialog box where a new
initial routing entry can be configured.
Edit: Displays the Edit Routing Entry dialog box where the
selected initial routing entry can be configured.
Delete: Deletes the selected routing entries.
Add to static: Copies the selected routing entries to the initial routing
table.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 181/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 182/374
182 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Figure VII-21 IP Routing Configuration Sheet,General Settings
4.2.1 General Settings
The general settings page allows the user to control the general use of the
OSPF and RIP 2 protocols for the selected NE. Enabling of protocols on
specific interfaces are performed in theRip Interfaces andOSPF Interfaces
property pages.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 183/374
B4008 Rev. M 183
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Property page controls:
OSPF Protocol: Select parameter settings for OSPF routing protocol.
Enable: Enables the NE to handle OSPF routing.
Redistribute RIP: Allows OSPF to redistribute routing
information from RIP v2 routing protocol.
Redistribute Static: Allows OSPF to redistribute static
routing information.
Default Cost: Setting of default cost value used for
OSPF protocol.
The “Redistribute” options allow the OSPF protocol to pass
the routing information of other routing protocols.
For information to be passed between the OSPF and RIP protocols, the current NE must have both protocols enabled.
RIP Protocol: Select parameter settings for RIP routing protocol.
Enable: Enables the NE to handle RIP routing.
Redistribute OSPF: Allows RIP to redistribute routing infor-
mation from OSPF routing protocol.
Redistribute Static: Allows RIP to redistribute static routing
information.
Default Metric: Setting of default metric value used for
RIP protocol.
The “Redistribute” options allow the RIP protocol to pass the
routing information of other routing protocols.
For information to be passed between the OSPF and RIP
protocols, the current NE must have both protocols enabled.
IP Configurable List of interfaces available on the current NE forthe OSPFInterfaces: and RIP protocols (IP enabled interfaces).
Interfaces may be enabled for IP in the Communication Ports
page for the specific interface (e.g. NI interface on CityLink).
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 184/374
184 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.2.2 Active Routes
Monitor active routes for current NE from this page.
Figure VII-22 IP Routing Configuration Sheet, Active Routes
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 185/374
B4008 Rev. M 185
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.2.3 Static Routes
Edit static routes regarding IP Routing using this page.
Figure VII-23 IP Routing Configuration Sheet, Static Routes
Property page controls:
Add: Add a new static route to the list using the appearing dialog.
Edit: Select a row and press ‘Edit’ to open the ‘Edit Static Route’ dialog.In this dialog the settings for the selected route may be changed.
Delete: Deletes the selected row(s) from the list.
Note! Changes to the Static Routes are not transferred to the NE before ‘Set’
is pressed.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 186/374
186 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.2.4 RIP Interfaces
Edit RIP Interfaces for current NE from this page.
Note!
In order to edit the ‘RIP areas’ settings, the RIP protocol must be disabled
in the General Settings page.
Figure VII-24 IP Routing Configuration Sheet, RIP Interfaces
Property page controls:
Add: Add a new RIP interface to the list using the appearing dialog.
Edit: Select a row and press ‘Edit’ to open the ‘Edit RIP Interface’ dialog.
In this dialog the settings for the selected interface may be
changed.
Delete: Deletes the selected row(s) from the list.
Note! Changes to the RIP Interfaces are not transferred to the NE before ‘Set’
is pressed.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 187/374
B4008 Rev. M 187
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.2.5 OSPF Interfaces
Edit OSPF Interfaces for current NE from this page.
Note!
In order to edit the ‘OSPF Interfaces’ settings, the OSPF protocol must be
disabled in the General Settings page.
Figure VII-25 IP Routing Configuration Sheet, OSPF Interfaces
Property page controls:
Add: Add a new OSPF interface to the list using the appearing dialog.
Edit: Select a row and press ‘Edit’ to open the ‘Edit OSPF Interface’
dialog. In this dialog the settings for the selected interface may be
changed.
Delete: Deletes the selected row(s) from the list.
Note! Changes to the OSPF Interfaces are not transferred to the NE before
‘Set’ is pressed.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 188/374
188 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.2.6 OSPF Areas
Edit settings for ‘OSPF areas’ for current NE from this page.
Note!
In order to edit the ‘OSPF Areas’ settings, the OSPF protocol must be
disabled in the General Settings page.
Figure VII-26 IP Routing Configuration Sheet, OSPF Interfaces
Property page controls:Add: Add a new OSPF area to the list using the appearing dialog.
Note! Use ‘Edit’ dialog to add new network ranges to existing areas.
Edit: Select a row and press ‘Edit’ to open the ‘Edit OSPF Area’ dialog.
In this dialog the settings for the area which the row belongs to may
be changed.
Delete: Deletes the selected row(s) from the list.
If a network range row is selected, only the network range is deleted.
In all other cases, the entire area is deleted.
Note! Changes to the OSPF areas are not transferred to the NE before ‘Set’
is pressed.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 189/374
B4008 Rev. M 189
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.3 Communication Ports
4.3.1 DCC (Data Communication Channel)
The CityLink DCC (Data Communication Channel) is used to communicate
between the Supervisory Unit of the Network Element and Supervisory Units
of other Network Elements through the SOH of the STM-1 traffic.
There are two DCC ports. DCC Line at the line side and DCC Radio at the radio
side. The DCC Radio is always enabled. Nera Stack will always be enabled
at DCC Radio.
The Communication Ports configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view.
Press the DCC tab to view/change the DCC settings. The sheet can also
be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the Explor-er view and then selecting Edit Communication Ports from the
Configuration menu.
Fields: Choices: Description:
Figure VII-27 DCC Tab in Communication Ports Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 190/374
190 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Enabled Switches the DCC communication ports
on/off.
Channel: The Channel where the DCC are
inserted in the SOH.
Ch. 1-Ch XX CityLink has only one channel. This
field will always be ‘Ch. 1’ at CityLink.
Direction
Line DCC Line is inserted the line side of the
radio.
Radio DCC Radio is inserted the radio side of
the radio.
Timeslot: Shows which timeslot in the SOH the
DCC channels use. The user can change
the used timeslot by pressing SOH. The
SDH Frame Section Overhead Dialog
box will appear.
Stack
Nera NERA Stack.
Nera stack is always enabled on the
radio side (DCC Radio).
QECC QECC Stack
TCP/IP TCP/IP Stack LAPD Data link layer for the QECC protocol.
For more information refer to ITU-T
G.784 and ITU-T Q.921.
Network side Server for the LAPD requests.
User side Client for the LAPD requests.
PPP: (Point to Point Protocol) Data link
layer for the TCP/IP protocol.
(currently not implemented)
Active mode (currently not implemented)Demand dial (currently not implemented)
Direct mode (currently not implemented)
Passive mode (currently not implemented)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 191/374
B4008 Rev. M 191
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.3.2 NI (Network Interface)
The CityLink NI (Network Interface) ports (NI-1 and NI-2) are used to connect
the Supervisory Unit of the Network Element to Supervisory Units of other
Network Elements. The NI ports on the front panel of the CityLink IDU are
used to connect the Network Elements. The NI ports can be set to a variety
of different configurations.
The NI 2 port, in the CityLink Radio, can be Enabled only if the Ethernet
function is Disabled, and vice versa.
The Communication Ports configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view.
Press the NI tab to view/change the NI settings. The sheet can also be
invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the Explorer
view and then selecting Edit Communication Ports from the Config-
uration menu.
Figure VII-28 NI Tab in Communication Ports Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 192/374
192 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Choices: Description:
Enabled Enables the NI port
Function CityLink The functionality of the NI port.
NL29x NI The baud rate and stack are
NL29x Qx grayed/whitened to indicate which
PDH Synchronous settings are necessary for thePDH Asynchronous different functionalities.
V.11 contra dir master
V.11 contra dir slave
V.11 co dir
Q1 V.11
NL29x V.11 contra
dir slave
Baudrate The baud rate (symbols pr. second)
of the NI port. If the field is grayed,
no baud rate is necessary to set.
1200 to 200000 Baud
Stack
Nera NERA Stack.
OSI OSI Stack
LAPD Data link layer for the QECC
protocol. For more information
refer to ITU-T G.784 and ITU-TQ.921.
Network side Server for the LAPD requests.
User side Client for the LAPD requests.
PPP: (Point to Point Protocol) Data link
layer for the TCP/IP protocol.
(currently not implemented)
Active mode (currently not implemented)
Demand dial (currently not implemented)
Direct mode (currently not implemented)Passive mode (currently not implemented)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 193/374
B4008 Rev. M 193
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Fields: Choices: Description:Baudrate: 1200 - 115200 Baudrate. The default baudrate is 115200.
4.3.3 LCT
The LCT port is the serial port (RS-232) that can be used to communicate with
a PC executing NEW-NMS. In this sheet the baud rate of the LCT port can
be changed.
WARNING!If you are communicating with the NE through the LCT (Serial) port and you
change the LCT baud rate you will loose contact with the NE until you
configure the NEW-NMS communication settings to the same baud rate
as the NE baud rate.
The Communication Ports configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view.
Press the LCT tab to view/change the LCT settings. The sheet can also be
invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the Explorer
view and then selecting Edit Communication Ports from the Config-
uration menu.
Figure VII-29 LCT Tab in Communication Ports Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 194/374
194 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.3.4 Ethernet
In the CityLink Radio the Ethernet port can be Enabledonly if the NI 2 port
is Disabled, and vice versa. See chapter 4.3.2.
The Communication Ports configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view.Press the Ethernet tab to view/change the Ethernet settings. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Communication Ports from the
Configuration menu.
Fields: Choices: Description:
Enabled Toggles Ethernet on/off
Stack OSI TP4 OSI Stack
TCP/IP TCP/IP Stack. Must be selected if IP
Tunneling is enabled.
Figure VII-30 Ethernet Tab in Communication Ports Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 195/374
B4008 Rev. M 195
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.3.5 IP Settings
The IP Settings sheet lets you view the IP address of the NE and configure
the subnet mask and default gateway. The IP address can be set in the
Element Id property sheet.
Fields: Description:IP address Shows the Internet Protocol (IP) address of the NE.
Subnet mask Type the Subnet Mask number obtained from your
network administrator. This number, combined with
the IP address, identifies which network your NE is on.
Default gateway For each adapter, type the correct IP address of the
default gateway used for forwarding packets to other
networks or subnets. This address should be provided
by the network administrator and is required for nodes
on internetworks. If this is not provided, IP functionalitywill be limited to the local subnet unless a route is
specified with the TCP/IP route command.
Figure VII-31 IP Settings Tab in Communication Ports Configuration Sheet
The Communication Ports configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view.
Press the IP Settings tab to view/change the NI settings. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Communication Ports from the
Configuration menu.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 196/374
196 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.3.6 IP Tunneling
A connection can be set up between two NEs through another network,
using the Internet Protocol. This is called IP Tunneling. Two connections,
IP Tunnel 1 and IP Tunnel 2, can be configured. Ethernet must be enabled
with TCP/IP Stack in order to use IP tunnels. Internet Protocol (IP)-
address, Section address and NE address are used for set up of IP tunnelsto other NEs. The IP tunnel must only be set up at one side of the tunnel.
The Communication Ports configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view.
Press the IP Tunneling tab to view/change the IP Tunneling settings. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node
in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Communication Ports
from the Configuration menu.
Fields: Choices: Description:
Enabled On/Off Toggles IP Tunneling on/off.
Remote section address The section address of the NE addressed
through the IP tunnel.
Remote NE address The NE address of the NE addressed
through the IP tunnel.Remote IP address The Internet Protocol (IP) address of
the NE addressed through the IP tunnel.
Figure VII-32 IP Tunneling Tab in Comm. Ports Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 197/374
B4008 Rev. M 197
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.3.7 OSI TP4 Tunneling
A connection can be set up between two NEs through another network,
using the OSI protocol. This is called OSI Tunneling. Two connections,
OSI TP4 Tunnel 1 and OSI TP4 Tunnel 2, can be configured. Ethernet must
be enabled with OSI Stack in order to use OSI TP4 Tunneling.
Network Service Access Point (NSAP)- address, Section address and NEaddress are used for set up of IP tunnels to other NEs.
The Communication Ports configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view.
Press the OSI TP4 Tunneling tab to view/change the OSI TP4 Tunneling
settings. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the
Equipment node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Com-
munication Ports from the Configuration menu.
Fields: Choices: Description:
Enabled: On/Off Toggles OSI Tunneling on/off
Remote section address: Shows the section address of the NE
addressed though OSI TP4 Tunnel
Remote NE address: Shows the SU address of the NEaddressed though OSI TP4 Tunnel
Remote NSAP address: 0 to 20 bytes
Figure VII-33 OSI TP4 Tunneling Tab in Comm. Ports Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 198/374
198 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.4 Looping
The loop settings are divided into five categories: Main traffic looping,
2Mbit/s Wayside traffic looping, 64kbit/s looping, 21x2Mbit/s looping and
DS3/E3 looping.
4.4.1 Main Looping
The Looping configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view. Press the
Main tab to view/change the Main looping settings. The sheet can also be
invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the Explorer
view and then selecting Edit Looping from the Configuration menu.
Figure VII-34 Looping Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 199/374
B4008 Rev. M 199
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Fields: Description:
Loop buttons: One button for each loop where the arrow indicates
which way the signal is looped. The colour of the loop
arrows describes the status of the loop:
Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop informa-tion has not been retrieved from the NE, or a loop message
has just been sent to the NE and the GUI (Graphical User
Interface) is waiting for a response from the NE. (The
loop settings have not been confirmed by the NE). Note
that the loop cannot be toggled when the status is unknown.
Black: The loop is off (inactive)
Red: The loop is on (active)
Loops will be Displays the time of which all main traffic loops in the NE
automatically will be cleared. This time is set by the user when activatingcleared after: a loop.
The different main traffic loops (from left to right in Figure 34):
• 4. SORP, LT output to LR input loop, far-end (IDU)
• 1. SORP LR output to LT input loop, near-end (IDU)
• 14. IF loop, near-end (IDU)
• 15. IF loop, near-end (ODU)
• 16. RF loop, near-end (ODU)
Buttons:
Close: Closes the property sheet.
Help: Press this button to get help on the current property sheet page. For
help on an item, click at the top of the dialog box, then click the item.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 200/374
200 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.4.2 64 Kbit/s Looping
The Looping configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view. Press the 64
Kbit/s Looping tab to view/change the looping settings. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting the Equipment node in the Explorer view and
then selecting Edit Looping from the Configuration menu.
Figure VII-35 Looping Configuration Sheet. 64kbit/s Tab
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 201/374
B4008 Rev. M 201
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Fields:
Loop buttons: One button for each loop where the arrow indicates
which way the signal is looped. The colour of the loop
arrows describes the status of the loop:
••••• Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop informa-tion has yet not been retrieved from the NE, or a loop
message has just been sent to the NE and the GUI is
waiting for a response from the NE. (The loop settings
have not yet been confirmed by the NE). Note that the
loop cannot be toggled when the status is unknown.
••••• Black: The loop is off (inactive)
••••• Red: The loop is on (active)
••••• Grey: The corresponding 64kbit/s channel is not enabled.
The different 64Kbit/s loops: (Figure VII-35 describes the loops)
• 40. 64Kbit/s G.703 (near end)
• 41. 64Kbit/s G.703 (far end)
• 42. 64Kbit/s V.11 (near end)
• 43. 64Kbit/s V.11 (far end)
Buttons:
Close: Closes the property sheet.Help: Press this button to get help on the current property sheet page. For
help on an item, click at the top of the dialog box, then click the item.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 202/374
202 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.4.3 2 Mbit/s Wayside Looping
The Looping configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view. Press the 2
Mbit/s Wayside tab to view/change the looping settings. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Looping from the Configura-tion menu.
Figure VII-36 Looping Configuration Sheet, Wayside Tab
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 203/374
B4008 Rev. M 203
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Fields:
Loop buttons: One button for each loop where the arrow indicates
which way the signal is looped. The colour of the loop
arrows describes the status of the loop:
••••• Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop informa-tion has yet not been retrieved from the NE, or a loop
message has just been sent to the NE and the GUI is
waiting for a response from the NE. (The loop settings
have not yet been confirmed by the NE). Note that the
loop cannot be toggled when the status is unknown.
••••• Black: The loop is off (inactive)
••••• Red: The loop is on (active)
••••• Grey: The corresponding 2Mbit/s channel is not enabled.
The different wayside loops: (Figure VII-36 describes the loops)
• 30. Wayside near end loop.
• 32. Wayside far end loop.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 204/374
204 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
PRBS Settings:
PRBS Generator: Generates a PRBS signal that can be inserted into the
transmit direction of the wayside channel.
Arrow buttons: Press a button to insert the PRBS
signal from the generator to the wayside channel.
There is one button for normal PRBS insert and one button for inverted PRBS insert. Red=enabled,
black=disabled, blue=unknown status,
grey=wayside disabled.
PRBS Check: Counts PRBS errors (An error is detected when the
signal differs from the expected PRBS signal).
Errors can be counted at the receive direction of the
wayside channel.
Arrow buttons: Press a button to enable the error
detection for the desired traffic direction. There isone button for normal PRBS check and one button
for inverted PRBS check. Red=enabled,
black=disabled, blue=unknown status,
grey=wayside disabled.
Count: The total number of deviations detected
between the received signal and expected PRBS
signal.
Rate: The number of deviations detected between
the received signal and expected PRBS signal per
second.
Reset button. Resets the cumulative counter.
Status:
· OK : Error check is valid.
· 2Mbit/s Wayside disabled: Wayside channel
is not enabled (See the 2Mbit/s Wayside property
sheet).
· Counter overflow: The error check is not valid because the counter has exceeded its limit (=232)
and wrapped around.
Sync loss: The error check is not valid due to sync
loss on the PRBS sequence.
Buttons:
Reset: Resets the PRBS Counter (includes the PRBS Rate)
Close: Closes the property sheet.
Help: Press this button to get help on the current property sheet page.
For help on an item, click at the top of the dialog box, then
click the item.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 205/374
B4008 Rev. M 205
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.4.4 21x2Mbit/s Looping (IDU: EMDK42A, 21x2Mbit/s
Extension board: 2NCS635A)
It is possible to set loops on each individual dropped 2Mbit/s. These loops
are further explained later in this chapter. It is only possible to set one kind
of loop at the time on a specific 2Mbit/s tributary.
The Looping configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view. Press the
21x2Mbit/s tab to view/change the tributary looping settings. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Looping from the Configura-
tion menu.
Figure VII-37 Looping Configuration Sheet, 21x2Mbit/s Tab
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 206/374
206 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Description:
2Mbit/s The physical port number on the 21x2Mbit/s tributary
board.
Loop type The user can select between three different loops.
Legal values are:• None
• 2Mbit-In → 2Mbit-Out Near End
• TMX→ DXC Near End
• 2Mbit-Out → 2Mbit-In Far End
Remaining time This is a status field for the remaining time the loop
will be present. When the time has expired, i.e. the
loops is switched off, this field will be set to Loop
cleared.
ON/OFF This column will contain cells that functions as check- boxes. If the user clicks a cell that isn’t checked, a
Loop Timer dialog will be launched (see Figure VII-
38). The user can set the duration of the loop from this
dialog. If the Loop type is None for a specific loop
item, the user can’t check this loop item’s checkbox.
Note: If the user, by means of the Drop or Continue dialog, removes any
of the tributaries in the list above, they will automatically be removed
from the list! This means that the number of loop items in the list (eight
in the figure above) will not be constant, but will be the same as in the
Drop or Continue dialog.
Figure VII-38 The Loop Timer Dialog Box
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 207/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 208/374
208 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
The LoopingConfiguration Property sheet can be opened from the Config-
uration context menu of the Equipment node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Equipment node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Looping from the Configuration
menu .
Property page controls:
Loop buttons: One button for each loop where the arrow indicates which way
the signal is looped. The colour of the loop arrows describes
the status of the loop:
Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop information
has not been retrieved from the NE, or a loop message
has just been sent to the NE and the GUI is waiting for
a response from the NE. (The loop settings have not
been confirmed by the NE). Note that the loop cannot
be toggled when the status is unknown.
Black:The loop is off (inactive)Red: The loop is on (active)
Figure VII-39 Looping Configuration Sheet, DS3/E3
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 209/374
B4008 Rev. M 209
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
PRBS Generator: Generates a PRBS signal that can be inserted into one
or both directions of the PDH Port.
Arrow buttons: Press a button to insert the PRBS
signal from the generator to the PDH
Port. Red=enabled, black=disabled,
blue=unknown status.Inverted: When checked, the generated PRBS
signal is inverted.
PRBS Check: Counts PRBS errors. Errors can be counted on one of
the PDH ports in one of the DS3/E3 directions at a time.
Arrow buttons: Press a button to enable the error
detection for the desired traffic
direction. Red=enabled, black=
disabled, blue=unknown status.Inverted: When checked, an inverted PRBS
signal is expected.
Count: The total number of deviations
detected between the received
signal and expected PRBS signal.
Rate: The number of deviations detected
between the received signal and
expected PRBS signal per second.
Reset button: Resets the cumulative counter.
Status: • OK: Error check is valid.
• Counter overflow: The error check
is not valid because the counter
has exceeded its limit (=232) and
wrapped around.
• Sync loss: The error check is not
valid due to sync loss on the PRBS
sequence.
Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and
NE. Loop status is updated regularly (5 second
interval) as long as this property sheet is open.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 210/374
210 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Description:
Article code: The Article Code
Serial no: The Serial number.
HW revision: Hardware revision
MAC address: The Media Access Control address of
the NE.
Production date: The date when the article was produced.
Test date: The date when the article was tested.
FAT date: The date when the Factory AcceptanceTest was found to be satisfactory.
4.5 In Door Unit (IDU)
4.5.1 IDU Production Data
The IDU production data property sheet shows the production serial
numbers and the production and test dates of the IDU. Only an administra-
tor can change the settings.
This sheet is also used for calibrating the Optical Line interface. Calibra-
tion is only needed when the optical unit is beginning to get old.
The IDU Production Data configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Production Data from the
Configuration menu.
Figure VII-40 IDU Production Data Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 211/374
B4008 Rev. M 211
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.5.2 64 kbit/s Channels
Two 64 kbit/s channels can be inserted into the SOH. Each of the 64 kbit/s
channel will occupy one byte of the SOH frame. Press the SOH Frame button
to select which bytes of the SOH that are used by the 64 kbit/s Channels.
One channel is the V.1l. This channel has to be of type V.11 Contra. The
other is the G.703 Channel. This channel can be either G.703 Co or G.703 Contra. Both channels can be retrieved from and inserted into the
line and radio side independently.
The 64 kbit/s Channels configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit 64 kbit/s Channels from the
Configuration menu.
Figure VII-41 64 kbit/s Channels Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 212/374
212 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Choices: Description
Status:
Enabled Enables the 64 kbit/s Channel.
Disabled Disables the 64 kbit/s Channel.
Type: Choose linecode for 64 kbit/s Channel.
V.11 Contra (Channel V.11)
G.703 Co (Channel G.703)
G.703 Contra (Channel G.703)
Direction: Choose the direction the 64 kbit/s Rx
Channel should be extracted from.
Line 64 kbit/s Rx is inserted from
line SOH frames.
Radio 64 kbit/s Rx is inserted from
radio SOH frames.
Timeslot: Shows which timeslot in the SOH the
64 kbit/s Rx Channel occupy.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 213/374
B4008 Rev. M 213
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.5.3 2 Mbit/s Wayside Channel
A 2 Mbit/s channel can be inserted in the SOH in either line-direction or radio-
direction. The 2 Mbit/s channel will occupy 33 bytes (32 bytes data + 1 byte
alignment information) of the SOH. Press the SOH Frame button to view
which bytes of the SOH that are used by the 2 Mbit/s Wayside Channel. The
2 Mbit/s channel uses the Rx and Tx connection at the front panel of the IDU.Rx is received data and Tx is sent data.
The 2 Mbit/s Wayside configuration sheet can be opened from the Configu-
ration context menu of theIDU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also be
invoked by selecting theIDU node in the Explorer view and then selectingEdit
2 Mbit/s Wayside from theConfiguration menu.
Figure VII-42 2 Mbit/s Wayside Channel Configuration Sheet
Fields: Options: Description:Status Enabled Enables the Wayside Channel
Disabled Disables the Wayside Channel
Direction Choose the direction the Wayside Rx channel
should be extracted from.
Line The Wayside channel is extracted from line
SOH. When the rate is set to DS1, the Line
direction is not available.
Radio The Wayside channel is extracted from radio
SOH.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 214/374
214 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Rate Choose the rate of the Wayside channel.
This field is only available when the NE
supports DS1 Wayside functionality. If not,
the rate is assumed to be E1.
E1 2 Mbit/s
DS1 1.5 Mbit/sCoding Choose the coding of the Wayside channel.
This field is only available when the NE
supports DS1 Wayside functionality. If not,
the coding is assumed to be of type HDB3.
HDB3 Only available for E1
AMI Only available for DS1
B8ZS Only available for DS1
Sensitivity This field is only available when the NE is
equipped with the DS3/E3 Extension Boardand the DS1 rate is selected
-30dB Only available for DS1
-36dB Only available for DS1
Cable Length This field is only available when the NE is
equipped with the DS3/E3 Extension Board
and the DS1 rate is selected
133-266 feet
266-399 feet
399-533 feet
533-655 feet
-7.5dB CSU
-15dB CSU
-22dB CSU
Buttons:
SOH frame Press this button to view which timeslots in the SOHthe Wayside channel occupies.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 215/374
B4008 Rev. M 215
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.5.4 SOH X-Connect
Two 64kbit/s (one SOH timeslot) cross-connections can be set up. The
cross-connections bypass the SORP so that the SOH time-slots are sent
from the Line receive unit directly to the Radio transmit unit.
The SOH X-Connect configuration sheet can be opened from the Config-uration context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also
be invoked by selecting (highlighting) theIDU node in the Explorer view and
then selectingEdit X-Connect from theConfiguration menu.
Figure VII-43 SOH X-Connect Configuration Sheet
Fields: Description:
Enabled/Disabled Switches SOH X-Connect on/off
Line timeslot The time slot to bypass the SORP.
Radio timeslot The destination time slot.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 216/374
216 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Choices: Description:
Enabled/Disabled Toggles Error Pulse Output On/Off
Source Only one sourceat a time.
FEC radio The output pin reflects the FEC on
the Viterbi asic.
B1 line The output pin reflects the B1 on
the Line Receive side of the SORP.
B2 line The output pin reflects the B2 on the
Line Receive side of the SORP.
B1 radio The output pin reflects the B1 on the
Radio Receive side of the SORP.B2 radio The output pin reflects the B2 on the
Radio Receive side of the SORP.
4.5.5 Error Pulse Output
For test purposes.
The SORP and Viterbi asics give error pulses when they recognize errors. The
number of error pulses per second is a measurement of the quality of the
received signals. These error pulses can be sent out on the ALM/AUX port.
The Error Pulse Output configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting the IDU node in the Explorer view and then
selecting Edit Error Pulse Output from the Configuration menu.
Figure VII-44 Error Pulse Output Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 217/374
B4008 Rev. M 217
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.5.6 Auxiliary Output Configuration
The auxiliary output function must be enabled in the Available Functions
property sheet (see Chapter 2.2, this Section) to use the function.
There are four configurable auxiliary output pins in the ALM/AUX port.
The pins are connected to a relay, which can either be controlled manually,
or triggered automatically on a user selectable set of alarms.The Auxiliary Output Configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Auxiliary Output from the
Configuration menu.
Figure VII-45 Auxiliary Output Configuration Sheet
Controls: Choices: Description:
Output control Manual Control Set the usage of the aux.output
radio buttons or pin. (This will be disabled if the
Alarm Trigger CityLink does not support
alarm triggers.)
Manual relay Closed or Open If the aux. output is set to
status radio manual control, these buttons
buttons will be enabled, and can be usedto manually control the state of
the relay.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 218/374
218 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Controls: Choices: Description:
Equipment tree Displays and selects the alarms
available for alarm triggers.
This will be disabled if the aux.
output is set to manual control.
Alarm trigger list Displays the alarm triggersconfigured. This will be dis-
abled if the aux. output is set to
manual control.
Add alarm button Adds the currently selected
alarm in the equipment tree to
the alarm trigger list. If there is
no selection, or if the selected
tree node doesn’t correspond to
an alarm, nothing happens.Disabled if the output is on
manual control.
Remove Removes the currently selected
alarm button alarm from the alarm trigger list.
Disabled if the output is on
manual control.
Alarm triggered Closed or Open If the aux. output is set to alarm
radio buttons triggered control, these buttons
will be enabled, and can be used
to control the state of the relay
when the alarm conditions are
raised.
Buttons:
Get: Press this button to retrieve the current settings from the NE.
(The settings are automatically retrieved from the NE when the
dialog box is opened).Set: Press this button to update the element with any changes made to
any of the Auxiliary Output pages in the dialog box.
Close: Closes the dialog box.
Help: Press this button to get help on the current property sheet. For help
on an item, click at the top of the dialog box, then click the item.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 219/374
B4008 Rev. M 219
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.5.7 Diagnose
The Diagnose function retrieves data about memory, boot errors and warnings,
boot version and number of resets of the SU of the NE. PressGet to retrieve the
data from the NE. The diagnose tests are performed at IDU reset. (Note that the
Viterbi decoder and SORP1 are only tested at cold reset)
The Diagnose configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also be
invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU node in the Explorer view and
then selecting Edit Diagnose from the Configuration menu.
Figure VII-46 Diagnose Configuration Sheet
Module Status Comments
CPLD OK/Not OK A write/read test sequence was performed
at last reset/startup.
RTC OK/Low bat/ A write/read test sequence was performed
Not running at last reset/startup.
LCD OK/Not OK A write/read test sequence was performed
at last reset/startup.
DRAM OK/Not OK A write/read test sequence was performedat last reset/startup.
SRAM OK/Not OK A write/read test sequence was performed
at last reset/startup.
Code FLASH OK/Not OK A write/read test sequence was performed
at last reset/startup.
Boot FLASH OK/Not OK A write/read test sequence was performed
at last reset/startup.
Viterbi Decoder OK/Not OK A write/read test sequence was performed
at last startup.
SORP OK/Not OK A write/read test sequence was performed
at last startup.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 220/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 221/374
B4008 Rev. M 221
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Fields: Choices: Description:
HBER 1.0·10-3 - 1.0·10-10 Error bit rate
A Major alarm is generated when the Viterbi
error rate exceeds the HBER threshold value.
AIS is inserted when the HBER thresholdvalue is exceeded.
LBER 1.0·10-3 - 1.0·10-11 Error bit rate
A Minor alarm is generated when the Viterbi
error rate exceeds the LBER threshold value.
EW 1.0·10-3 - 1.0·10-12 Error bit rate.
A Warning is generated when the Viterbi
error rate exceeds the Error Warning
threshold value.
Figure VII-48 BER Threshold Configuration Sheet
Internal proportions: HBER > LBER > EW
The BER Threshold configuration sheet can be opened from the Configu-
ration context menu of theRadio nodeunder the IDU node in the Explorer view.
The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Radio node
under the IDU node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit BER Threshold from theConfiguration menu.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 222/374
222 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.5.10 OSI Configuration
The OSI configuration has to be set to get OSI traffic on your LAN, routed
through the Nera network.
4.5.10.1 OSI Line Coding
Choose the scheme for the encoding of the binary data stream in the
communication channels. The two ends of a communications line must be
configured with the same Line Encoding in order to communicate!
Figure VII-49 OSI Configuration Sheet, Line Coding Tab
Fields: Description:
NI1: The line coding for the NI1 interface. Can be NRZ or NRZI.
NI2: The line coding for the NI2 interface. Can be NRZ or NRZI.
DCC Line: The line coding for the DCC Line interface.
Can be NRZ or NRZI.
DCC Radio: The line coding for the DCC Radio interface.
Can be NRZ or NRZI.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 223/374
B4008 Rev. M 223
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.5.10.2 OSI Parameters
Configure the OSI parameters for the different communication channels.
To enable OSI for the different channels, do this at the appropriate
Communication ports configuration page. Link state protocol buffer size
apply to all channels.
Figure VII-50 OSI Configuration Sheet, Parameters Tab
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 224/374
224 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Subfield: Description:
NSAP Address Area ID Subnet address.
Host ID End system address.
End Selector Type of service. Always 01.
Link state Transmitted buffer length size of IS
protocol hello-packets.(512-1492 bytes)
buffer size
Parameters MTU size Maximum Transmission Unit size.
(512-1497 bytes)
Default Metric Cost of path.
LAPD Role: Client/Server role
The two ends of a communications line
must be configured with the opposite
roles in order to communicate!
OSI Enabled This control is checked if OSI is
enabled for the respective interface.
This is set in the NI or DCC Commu-
nication Ports Configuration pages
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 225/374
B4008 Rev. M 225
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.5.10.3 OSI Routing Table
This page shows the OSI Routing Table contained in the IDU. The list
shows Host Id and Metric for all entries in the table. To get an updated
Routing Table, press the Get Button.
Figure VII-51 OSI Configuration Sheet, Routing Table Tab
Fields: Description:
Host Id End system address.
Metric Cost of path.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 226/374
226 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Figure VII-52 OSI Configuration Sheet, Interface Information Tab
4.5.10.4 OSI Interface Information
There will be one line in the table for each channel enabled for OSI.
Fields: Description:
Id Numbering of interfaces in the network
InterfaceName Network user
Media Type of media
Status Indication of connection status (Up or Down)MTU Size Maximum transmission unit size
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 227/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 228/374
228 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Buttons: Description:
ALS:
Enabled/Disabled Toggles ALS On/Off
Waiting Time (1.0 - 5.0 minutes ) Specifies waiting
time before the laser is turned on. If
section of operation is connected and
optical signal from far end is present,
laser will remain on, if not laser will
be turned off after 2 seconds.
Get Retrieves Laser Control settings
from the NE.
Set Sends Laser Control settings to the NE.
Restart (2 Seconds) Manually restart the laser for 2 seconds.
Restart (90 Seconds) Manually restart the laser for
90 seconds for testing purposes.
Manual
Control: (ALS disabled or not implemented)
On Manually turn the laser on.
Off Manually turn the laser off.
Status: Shows the status of the Laser Unit.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 229/374
B4008 Rev. M 229
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.5.12 IDU Replace Unit Wizard
The Replace Unit Wizard simplifies the process of replacing an IDU. The
wizard copies configuration data from “old” IDU to the “new” IDU.
Note:
• The NEW program must be directly connected to the LCT port on theIDU (serial communication).
• The “old” NEs configuration data is copied to the “new” IDU,
including Element ID. Thus the addresses of the “new” IDU
become equal to the addresses of the “old” IDU.
• Available Functions data is not copied. The “new” IDU may have
other optional functions available than the “old” IDU.
The wizard describes each step in the replacement process.
Figure VII-54 The IDU Replace Unit Wizard
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 230/374
230 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.6 Out Door Unit (ODU)
4.6.1 Type I ODU
4.6.1.1 Frequency Settings
The Duplex Distance between the Rx and Tx band is fixed. The user can set
the Tx frequency by clicking on the frequency slots. Since the duplexdistance is fixed the Rx frequency will be automatically set. The corre-
sponding Tx and Rx frequency must be set in the opposite NE.
Note! Dual Frequency - Single Polarisation (DF-SP) requires two chan-
nels in order to transmit 2xSTM-1. With this configuration, adjacent
channels can not be used.
NEW NMS/Configurator receives the frequency plan from the NE.
When no NE is connected (off-line), no frequency plan will be shown.
The output power is automatically muted when the frequency setting is
executed.
The Frequency configuration sheet can be opened from the Configura-
tion context menu of the ODU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the ODU node in the Explorer
view and then selecting Edit Frequency from the Configurationmenu.
Figure VII-55 Frequency Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 231/374
B4008 Rev. M 231
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Fields: Description:
Frequency Select the desired frequency plan. The frequency
plan plan must correspond to your transceiver.
Coding The coding function used in the modulator/
demodulator. These coding functions may beselectable depending on frequency plan:
TCM (Trellis coded modulation) andTCM + RS
(Trellis coded modulation and Reed Solomon).
Modulation The modulation scheme used with this frequency
plan
Data Rate The data rate(s) supported by this frequency plan.
The available data rates may also be dependent on
radio type, radio software version and coding.
Channel Spacing (MHz) The distance between the channels in this freq-uency plan
Duplex Distance (MHz) The distance between the TX and the RX carrier
frequency.
Innermost Spacing (MHz)The distance between the highest selectable freq-
quency in the lower half of the plan and the lowest
selectable frequency in the upper half og the plan.
TX Frequency (GHz) The used TX Carrier frequency
RX Frequency (GHz) The used RX Carrier frequency
TX (min) (GHz) TX Lower sideband frequency for this frequency
plan
TX (max) (GHz) TX Upper sideband frequency for this frequency
plan
RX (min) (GHz) RX Lower sideband frequency for this frequency
plan
RX (max) (GHz) RX Upper sideband frequency for this frequency
plan
••••• To change the settings:
1. Get the current settings from the Network element by pressing Get. (The
settings are automatically retrieved from the NE when the property-sheet
is opened)
2. Alter the settings by clicking the frequency band you want to transmit
your TX data. The RX frequency is automatically updated since the
duplex Distance is fixed.
3. Press Set to send the changes to the NE.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 232/374
232 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.6.1.2 ODU Transceiver - Power Configuration
The Transceiver Power Configuration sheet lets the user set some Output
Power settings, some RF Input warning thresholds and ATPC settings.
ATPC (Automatic Transceiver Power Control) is a function for effective-
ly reducing the interference probability in your network. The output power from the transceiver is automatic controlled. If the regulation loop for the
ATPC stops functioning, an alarm is generated. This alarm can be delayed.
The output power is automatically muted when the frequency setting is
executed.
The Power configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the ODU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also
be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the ODU node in the Explorer view
and then selecting Edit Power from the Configuration menu.
Figure VII-56 Power Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 233/374
B4008 Rev. M 233
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Fields: Denomination: Description:
RF input level dBm The upper threshold value for when
warning, high to generate an RF input level
warning (Alarm no. 1504)
RF input level dBm The lower threshold value for when
warning, low to generate an RF input level
warning (Alarm no. 1504)
ATPC dBm Set the power level to use when an
alarm level ATPC alarm occurs.
ATPC dBm The wanted input level when ATPC
reference level is activated.
Mute Mutes the output power. No output
output power power is sent.
Maximum dBm Maximum output power for
output power transmitting
Manual dBm The output power level used whenoutput level ATPC is not activated
ATPC status ATPC Disabled/ Enabled
ATPC mode ATPC can operate in four different modes:
Automatic Regulation: The trans-
ceiver automatically regulates the
transmitter power
Minimum Output: A min. amount of power is used for transmitting.
Maximum Output: A max. amount of
power is used for transmitting.
Freeze Output Power: A fixed amount
of power is used for transmitting.
ATPC Seconds The ATPC alarm can be delayed from
alarm delay 1 to 15 seconds.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 234/374
234 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Figure VII-57 ODU Production Data Configuration Sheet
4.6.1.3 ODU Production Data
The ODU production data property sheet shows the production serial
numbers and the production and test dates of the ODU. Only an adminis-
trator can change the settings.
The ODU Production Data configuration sheet can be opened from theConfiguration context menu of the ODU node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the ODU node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Production Data from the
Configuration menu.
Fields: Description:
Article code: The article code
Serial no: The serial number.
HW revision: Hardware revision
Sales order: The purchase order.
Production date: The date when the article was produced.
Test date: The date when the article was tested.
FAT date: The date when the Factory Acceptance Test was
found to be satisfactory.SAT date: The date when the Site Acceptance Test was
found to be satisfactory.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 235/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 236/374
236 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields:
Mute output power: When checked the output power is muted.
Maximum output level (dBm): The transmitter’s maximum output power.
Manual Transmit Output Power (MTPC): ATPC is disabled. Constant
manual output level is used.Automatic Transmit Output Power (ATPC): ATPC is enabled. Output
level is automatically adjusted using the specified ATPC settings.
Alarm Thresholds:
• RF-INPUT-WARNING, high (dBm): If the RF input level exceeds
this value the ”RF-INPUT-WARNING” alarm is raised.
• RF-INPUT-WARNING, low (dBm): If the RF input level goes
below this value the ”RF-INPUT-WARNING” alarm is raised.
MTPC:
• Manual output level (dBm): The output power used when ATPC isdisabled.
ATPC:
• Reference input level (dBm): The desired input level. If ATPC is
enabled on the transmitter across the hop, that transmitter will regulate
its output power such that the received input level at this receiver is
equal to the reference level.
• Default output level (dBm): The output power to be used if the ATPC
regulation loop fails. (The ”ATPC” alarm is raised).
• Alarm delay (s): The delay (in seconds) before the ATPC alarm is
raised after the ATPC regulation loop fails.
Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and
NE.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 237/374
B4008 Rev. M 237
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.6.2.2 Frequency Settings
The Frequency property sheet displays the frequency settings for the
transceiver unit. Available frequency plans and their parameters are stored
in a table in the NEW-NMS database. If the wanted frequency plan cannot
be found in the combo box, please contact Nera for upgrading the database
table. When frequency data is retrieved from the NE, the data are matchedagainst frequency plans stored in your database system. If a match is found
the appropriate frequency plan is selected, otherwise a frequency plan can
be selected from the combo box.
To change the frequencies:
1. Select a frequency plan from the combo box.
2. Select a TX frequency by pressing a button in the frequency plan. The
RX frequency will be calculated from TX frequency and the duplex
distance.3. Send the new settings to the NE. (Press the Set button in the property
sheet). A message box will be displayed asking whether to apply the
contrary frequencies to the other side of the hop (if the remote NE is
present in NEW).
Figure VII-59 Frequency Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 238/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 239/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 240/374
240 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Figure VII-61 DRO Tuning Procedure
T x T un ing
R x T un ing
4.6.2.3 DRO Tuning Procedure
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 241/374
B4008 Rev. M 241
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.6.2.3.1 Frequency Setting
Highlight the actual Transceiver unit to be tuned. Right click and choose
Configuration and Frequency.
Transceiver Unit Ch1
See Chapter 4.6.2.2 for setting of frequency.
Figure VII-62 Selecting in Explorer View the Transceiver to be tuned
Figure VII-63 Frequency Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 242/374
242 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.6.2.3.2 DRO Tuning
Highlight the actual Transceiver unit to be tuned. Right click and choose
Configuration andDRO Tuning
Tx tuning
Disabled
Rx tuning
Tx tuning
Select Tx tuning in the DRO Tuning Mode field. Press the Set button.
Figure VII-64 Selecting DRO tuning from the Explorer View
Figure VII-65 DRO Tuning Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 243/374
B4008 Rev. M 243
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
The red arrow indicates which way to adjust the DRO. In addition, the
Alarm LED on the front of the Transceiver will blink when the DRO must
be turned clockwise. If the Alarm LED is OFF, the DRO must be turned
counter-clockwise. When the Alarm LED is ON, the Synthesizer is in
lock. Press the Set button to update the window.
Figure VII-66 DRO Tuning Configuration Sheet, Tx tuning
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 244/374
244 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Rx Tuning
Disabled
Tx tuning
Rx tuning
Select Rx tuning in the DRO Tuning Mode field. Press the Set button.
Figure VII-67 DRO Tuning Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 245/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 246/374
246 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.6.2.4 Production Data
The different boards/units contain some production information. This
information is displayed in the Production Data property sheet.
Fields: Description:
Article code: Uniquely identifies the type of board/unit.
Serial no.: The serial number of the board/unit.HW revision: The hardware revision.
Production date: When the production process was completed for
this board/unit.
Test date: When this product was tested by the factory test-
department.
Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and
NE.
Figure VII-69 Production Data Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 247/374
B4008 Rev. M 247
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.6.3 Type III ODU
4.6.3.1 RF Power
The XCVR Unit provides a set of RF power control functions:
• RF input alarm thresholds can be set such that an alarm is raised when
the input level exceeds the upper or lower limits.• ATPC (Automatic Transmitter Power Control) is a function for effec-
tively reducing the interference probability in the network. When ATPC
is enabled, the output power from the transmitter is automatically
controlled according the received input power on the other side of the
hop. The ”ATPC” alarm is generated if the ATPC regulation loop fails.
This alarm can be optionally delayed.
• If ATPC is not enabled, the transmitted output level can be set. The
transmitter can also be muted.
The RF Power property sheet is used to display/configure the RF Power
control settings.
Figure VII-70 Power Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 248/374
248 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields:
Mute output power: When checked the output power is muted.
Maximum output level (dBm): The transmitter’s maximum output
power.
Manual Transmit Output Power (MTPC): ATPC is disabled. Constantmanual output level is used.
Automatic Transmit Output Power (ATPC): ATPC is enabled. Output
level is automatically adjusted using the specified ATPC settings.
Alarm Thresholds:
• RF-INPUT-WARNING, high (dBm): If the RF input level exceeds
this value the ”RF-INPUT-WARNING” alarm is raised.
• RF-INPUT-WARNING, low (dBm): If the RF input level goes
below this value the ”RF-INPUT-WARNING” alarm is raised.
MTPC:• Manual output level (dBm): The output power used when ATPC is
disabled.
ATPC:
• Reference input level (dBm): The desired input level. If ATPC is
enabled on the transmitter across the hop, that transmitter will regulate
its output power such that the received input level at this receiver is
equal to the reference level.
• Default output level (dBm): The output power to be used if the ATPC
regulation loop fails. (The ”ATPC” alarm is raised).
• Alarm delay (s): The delay (in seconds) before the ATPC alarm is
raised after the ATPC regulation loop fails.
Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and
NE.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 249/374
B4008 Rev. M 249
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.6.3.2 Frequency Settings
The Frequency property sheet displays the frequency settings for the
transceiver unit. Available frequency plans and their parameters are stored
in a table in the NEW-NMS database. If the wanted frequency plan cannot
be found in the combo box, please contact Nera for upgrading the database
table. When frequency data is retrieved from the NE, the data are matchedagainst frequency plans stored in your database system. If a match is found
the appropriate frequency plan is selected, otherwise a frequency plan can
be selected from the combo box.
To change the frequencies:
1. Select a frequency plan from the combo box.
2. Select a TX frequency by pressing a button in the frequency plan. The
RX frequency will be calculated from TX frequency and the duplex
distance.3. Send the new settings to the NE. (Press the Set button in the property
sheet). A message box will be displayed asking whether to apply the
contrary frequencies to the other side of the hop (if the remote NE is
present in NEW).
Figure VII-71 Frequency Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 250/374
250 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields:
Frequency Plan:
• Selected plan: The currently selected frequency plan. The graphical
presentation of the plan contains channel buttons that can be used to set
the TX and RX frequencies for the selected channel in the list.• Modulation: modulation method: 32TCM or 128 TCM.
• Channel spacing: The distance in MHz between two consecutive
channels.
• Data rate: STM-1 or STM-0.
Current Setting:
• TX frequency (GHz): The Transmitter frequency.
• RX frequency (GHz): The Receiver frequency.
Transceiver limits: The frequency band limits of the transceiver.
Status: Frequency status:• OK: Frequency settings are OK.
• Frequency shifting: The frequencies are changed on both sides of the
hop. If no connection is established within 10 seconds the frequencies
will be reverted.
Message info field: Displays status of data exchange between GUI and
NE.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 251/374
B4008 Rev. M 251
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
4.6.3.3 Production Data
The ODU production data property sheet shows the production serial
numbers and the production and test dates of the ODU. Only an adminis-
trator can change the settings.
The ODU Production Data configuration sheet can be opened from theConfiguration context menu of the ODU node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the ODU node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Production Data from the
Configuration menu.
Figure VII-72 Production Data Configuration Sheet
Fields: Description:
Article code: The article code
Serial no: The serial number.
HW revision: Hardware revision
Sales order: The purchase order.
Production date: The date when the article was produced.
Test date: The date when the article was tested.
FAT date: The date when the Factory Acceptance Test was
found to be satisfactory.SAT date: The date when the Site Acceptance Test was
found to be satisfactory.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 252/374
252 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Figure VII-73 Antenna Data Configuration Sheet
4.6.4 Antenna Data
This sheet shows some main characteristics of the antenna. Only the
Antenna code can be altered. The antenna data are stored in a database file.
The Antenna Data configuration sheet can be opened from the Configu-
ration context menu of the Antenna node in the Explorer view. The sheetcan also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Antenna node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Antenna from the Configura-
tion menu.
Fields: Description:Antenna code The antenna code. Unique code for each antenna type.
Gain The antenna gain (dB). Gain is a measurement of the
antenna's ability to transform electrical signals to
electromagnetic waves.
Diameter The physical antenna diameter. [meter]
Polarization The polarization direction of the antenna.
Front/Back ratio Front/Back Ratio. Ratio between the gain in forward
direction and the gain in backward direction.
Frequency range The frequency range where the antenna can be expected
to operate successfully.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 253/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 254/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 255/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 256/374
256 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
5.1.1.1 VC-12 Selector
This dialog is used to select a specific VC-12 from the 63 available in the
STM-1 payload. In addition to the VC-12 number, the direction from
which the specific VC-12 is routed to/from is also specified.
This dialog will be launched immediately after the user has checked anitem in the Drop or Continue dialog.
Fields: Description:
VC-12 # The VC-12 number. It must be in the interval [1,63].
K The first of the three numbers in the KLM number-
ing scheme. The number must be in the interval [1,3].
Note that the user can either enter the K number directly or use the up/down buttons to traverse the
number range.
L The second of the three numbers in the KLM num-
bering scheme. The number must be in the interval
[1,7]. Note that the user can either enter the L
number directly or use the up/down buttons to traverse
the number range.
M The third of the three numbers in the KLM number-
ing scheme. The number must be in the interval [1,3].
Note that the user can either enter the M number
directly or use the up/down buttons to traverse the
number range.
Drop From Line If selected, the VC-12 will be routed to/from the line
interface of the NE.
Drop From Radio If selected, the VC-12 will be routed to/from the
radio interface of the NE.
Figure VII-76 The VC-12 Selector Dialog Box
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 257/374
B4008 Rev. M 257
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Sub Network SNCP performs path protection switching (called
Connection dedicated protection) which manages all traffics by
Protection - SNCP a path. Working traffic is transmitted in one direc-
tion, and protection traffic in opposite direction
around the ring, and traffic is selected at each end of
the path. So, SNCP supports multiple rings, andoffers suitable solution for access and metro net-
work where hub node terminates most various
traffics. SNCP can also transmit signal to only one
direction, west or east, and the products can be used
as 1+0 Linear ADM mode as well as SNCP mode.
Buttons:
OK: Click this button to close the dialog and apply the setting.
Cancel: Click this button to close the dialog without applying the setting.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 258/374
258 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
5.1.2 PRBS Test - Check
The PRBS Test - Check sheet is used to set up which of the dropped
2Mbit/s tributaries that shall check a given PRBS. Only one 2Mbit/s
tributary can perform this test at the time.
The PRBS Test - Check configuration sheet can be opened from theConfiguration context menu of the 21x2 Extension board node in the
Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting)
the 21x2 Extension board node in the Explorer view and then selecting
Edit PRBS Test from the Configuration menu.
Figure VII-77 The PRBS Test Check Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 259/374
B4008 Rev. M 259
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Fields: Description:
2Mbit/s The physical port number on the 21x2Mbit/s tributary board.
Direction Used to set from which Direction the tributary board shall
check PRBS. To change the setting, the user must double-
click the Direction cell in question. When this happens, acombobox will be displayed in the cell and the user can
select a new setting for the cell.
Inverted If this checkbox is checked, it will be assumed that the
received PRBS is inverted. If not checked, it’s assumed to
not be inverted.
Clear If this checkbox is checked the Count cell will be cleared
when Set button is clicked.
Check Only one tributary can be set to check PRBS at the time. This
means that only one item in the list above can be active at thesame time. In the figure above this is item-1. Item-2 through
item-8 aren’t active. If e.g. the radio button in item-1 in the
figure is clicked (the one that is active), it will be cleared. In
this case none of the tributaries will check PRBS.
Count This cell will contain the number of error pulses. It’s a 2^16
bits wrap-around counter. If the Status cell is Sync Loss,
this counter will not count but instead be set to «—». If the
Status cell is No Sync Loss, this counter will count errors.
Status The status of the counter.
Note: If the user, by means of the Drop or Continue dialog, removes any
of the tributaries in the list above, they will automatically be removed
from the list!
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 260/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 261/374
B4008 Rev. M 261
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Fields: Description:
2Mbit/s The physical port number on the 21x2Mbit/s
tributary board.
Direction Used to set in which Direction the tributary
board shall insert a PRBS. To change the settingthe user must double click the Direction cell in
question. When this happens, a combobox will
be displayed in the cell and the user can select a
new setting for the cell. Legal values are:
• 2Mbit/s
• STM-1
• 2Mbit/s & STM-1
• Both off
Insert If this checkbox is checked a PRBS will beinserted in the direction(s) specified by
Direction.
Insert inverted PRBS If this checkbox is checked all checked tribu-
taries in the list will be inserted inverted PRBS.
If not checked it’s assumed to not be inverted.
Note: If the user, by means of the Drop or Continue dialog, removes any
of the tributaries in the list above, they will automatically be removed
from the list!
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 262/374
262 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
5.1.4 Production Data - 21x2Mbit/s Extension board
(2NCS635A)
Production data for the 21x2Mbit/s extension board, displayed on a separate
page in theProduction Data configuration sheet. Only an administrator can
change the settings.
The Production Data configuration sheet can be opened from the Con-
figuration context menu of the IDU- or Switch node in the Explorer view.
The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU- or
Switch node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Production
Data from the Configuration menu. Then the production data is located
under the Tab named 21x2Mbit/s Extension Board.
Fields: Description:Article Code The Article Code of the card/unit.
Serial no. The Serial number of the card/unit.
HW revision Hardware revision of the card/unit.
Production date The date when the article was produced.
Test date The date when the article was tested.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 263/374
B4008 Rev. M 263
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
5.2 DS3/E3 Extension Board
5.2.1 DS3/E3 Configuration
The DS3/E3 functionality allows the operator to connect two Virtual Contain-
ers (VC) in different ports. The connections are identified by using the
background colour of the ports together with the KLMaddress of the virtual
container. The background colour of a virtual container identifies the source
port, while the KLM address identifies the source address.
As an example consider the marked VCs in Figure VII-79. The VC on the Line
Port is connected with the VC having a KLM address of 1,2,1 on the Radio
Port. While the VC on the Radio Port is connected with the VC having a KLM
address of 1,1,1 on the Line Port.
SNCP functionality is available on the DS3/E3 Port and is identified with asplit cell.
Traffic Looping is achieved by connecting VCs on the same port and is only
available for the line - and radio port. The DS3/E3 port does not support traffic
looping, but does however support test looping. DS3/E3 looping is only
available on the connected when the port has been configured to add/drop
traffic.
The DS3/E3 Configuration sheet can be opened from the Configurationcontext menu of theDS3/E3 Extension Board node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) theDS3/E3 Extension
Board node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit DS3/E3 from the
Configuration menu .
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 264/374
264 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Buttons:
SNCP: Press this button to establish an SNCP connection. The SNCP
functionality will apply to the same virtual container on all
ports. SNCP is available on the DS3/E3 Port.
Source: To establish a connection, select a virtual container from one
of the ports. Press this button to set the selected container as
the source.
Destination: Select a virtual container from one of the ports and press this
button to set the selected container as the destination.
Disconnect: Select a virtual container which already has an establishedconnection. Press this button to remove the connection.
Cancel: Press this button to undo the current operation.
Get: Press this button to retrieve the current settings from the
NE. (The settings are automatically retrieved from the
NE when the dialog box is opened).
Set: Press this button to send the settings to the NE.
Close: Closes the property sheet.
Help: Press this button to get help on the current property sheet. For
help on an item, click at the top of the dialog box, then click
the item.
Figure VII-79 DS3/E3 Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 265/374
B4008 Rev. M 265
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
5.2.2 DS3/E3 Frame Structure Configuration
The operator may configure the frame structure on the three ports. Each port
consists of three TUG-3’s ( SDH Multiplex Structure). Each TUG-3 contains
either a VC-3 structure or a VC-12 structure. The virtual containers on the
ports are identified using KLM notation:
Figure VII-80 Virtual Containers
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 266/374
266 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Figure VII-81 DS3/E3 Frame Structure Configuration Sheet
Buttons:
VC-3: Sets the current structure to VC-3.VC-12: Sets the current structure to VC-12.
Get: Press this button to retrieve the current settings from the
NE. (The settings are automatically retrieved from the
NE when the dialog box is opened).
Set: Press this button to send the settings to the NE.
Close: Closes the property sheet.
Help: Press this button to get help on the current property sheet. For
help on an item, click at the top of the dialog box, then click
the item.SDH: This button indicates that the transmission standard is set to
SDH.
SONET: This button indicates that the transmission standard is set to
SONET.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 267/374
B4008 Rev. M 267
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
5.3 ADM STM-1 Extension Board (X-Connect)
5.3.1 X-Connect Frame Structure Configuration
The operator may configure the frame structure on the three ports. For more
info, please refer to Chapter 5.2.2 (this Section)
The Frame Structure Configuration property page is available from the
Transmission Configuration property sheet. Select “Enable X-Connect”
from the “Termination Enabling” combo box in the “Termination and SETS”
property page. The Transmission Configuration property sheet can be
opened from the Configuration context menu of thetransmission node in the
Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the
transmission node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit Transmis-
sion Configuration from theConfiguration menu .
Figure VII-82 Frame Structure Configuration Sheet
Buttons:
VC-3: Sets the current structure to VC-3.
VC-12: Sets the current structure to VC-12.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 268/374
268 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Figure VII-83 X-Connect Frame Structure Configuration Sheet
5.3.2 X-Connect Configuration
The X-connect functionality allows the operator to connect two Virtual
Containers (VC) in different ports. The connections are identified by using
the background colour of the ports together with the KLM address of the
virtual container. The background colour of a VC identifies the source port,
while the KLM address identifies the source address.
As an example consider the marked VCs in the figure below. The VC on the
Line Port is X-connected with the virtual container having a KLM address
of 1,2,1 on the Radio Port. While the VC on the Radio Port is X-connected
with the VC having a KLM address of 1,1,1 on the Line Port.
SNCP functionality is available on the Line Port and is identified with a split
cell.
Looping is achieved by connecting VCs on the same port (Traffic Looping).
The X-ConnectConfiguration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of theX-Connect Extension Board node in the Explorer view.
The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the X-Connect
Extension Board node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit X-
Connect from theConfiguration menu .
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 269/374
B4008 Rev. M 269
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Buttons:
SNCP: Press this button to establish an SNCP connection. The SNCP
functionality will apply to the same virtual container on all
ports. SNCP is available on the Line Port.
Source: To establish a connection, select a virtual container from one
of the ports. Press this button to set the selected container asthe source.
Destination: Select a virtual container from one of the ports and press this
button to set the selected container as the destination.
Disconnect: Select a virtual container which already has an established
connection. Press this button to remove the connection.
Cancel: Press this button to undo the current operation.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 270/374
270 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Figure VII-84 Hot Standby Explorer view
6.0 Hot Standby
6.1 General
A CityLink Hot Standby system consists of two InDoor Units connected to
an IDU Switch and two OutDoor Units connected to the a HSB branching
unit. The IDU switch performs switching in the Rx direction, while the branching unit has an RF-switch in the Tx direction.
6.1.1 Functionality
The IDU switch will perform most of the normal tasks of an IDU, with the two
IDUs maintaining modem functionality. Thus, configuration of line inputs,
wayside channels etc will be handled on the switch, while modem-specific
functionality (e.g Viterbi error pulses) is found on the IDU. Some function-
ality, like auxiliary outputs, are found in both places.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 271/374
B4008 Rev. M 271
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
6.1.2 Element ID
The CityLink Element ID property sheet shows some main information about
the Network Element like name, type, serial number and different addresses.
The enabled fields can be altered by users with proper user privileges.
The Element ID configuration sheet can be opened from the Configurationcontext menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also
be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the Explorer view
and then selecting Edit Element ID from the Configuration menu.
Figure VII-85 Element ID Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 272/374
272 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Description:
Serial number: The serial number of the NE. (Not editable)
NE type: The type of NE. (Not editable)
Name: The name of the NE (max. 32 characters)
Section address: The section address of the NE. (1-254)NE address: The NE address (1-128). Used for identification of
NEs within a section.
MAC address: The Media Access Control address of the NE.
Used for OSI-Management. (Not editable)
NSAP address: The Network Service Access Point address of the NE.
Used for OSI-Management.
IP address The Internet Protocol address of the NE.
1+1 Hot Standby: Select this option in order to set up a hot standby
element. A list of choices are displayed in the droplist;Standard,SD Combiner (Space Diversity Combiner),
SD Hybrid (Space Diversity Hybrid) and
Dual Antenna.
1+1 Freq. Diversity: Select this option in order to set up a frequency
diversity element. A list of choices are displayed in the
droplist; Standard, SD Combiner (Space Diversity
Combiner) andSD Hybrid (Space Diversity Hybrid)
To change the settings:
1 First, get the current settings from the NE by pressing Get.
(The settings are automatically retrieved from the NE when the
property-sheet is opened.)
2 Alter the settings you want to change.
3 Press Set to send the changes to the NE.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 273/374
B4008 Rev. M 273
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Figure VII-86 HSB Looping Configuration Sheet
6.1.2.1 HSB Main Looping
The Looping configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of theEquipment node in the Explorer view. Press the Main tab
to view/change the Main looping settings. The sheet can also be invoked
by selecting (highlighting) theEquipment node in the Explorer view and then
selectingEdit Looping from the Configuration menu.
6.1.2 Looping Configuration
When opening the Looping Sheet on a HSB NE, the pages for main, wayside
and 64Kbit looping will apply for both IDUs. If a loop is set on the IDU and
the system switches, the signal will still be looped.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 274/374
274 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields:
Loop buttons: One button for each loop where the arrow indicates
which way the signal is looped. The colour of the loop
arrows describes the status of the loop:
Blue: The status of the loop is unknown. Loop informa-tion has not been retrieved from the NE, or a loop message
has just been sent to the NE and the GUI is waiting for a
response from the NE. (The loop settings have not been
confirmed by the NE). Note that the loop cannot be toggled
when the status is unknown.
Black: The loop is off (inactive)
Red: The loop is on (active)
Loops will be Displays the time of which all main traffic loops in the NE
automatically will be cleared. This time is set by the user when activatingcleared after: a loop.
The different main traffic loops
(from left to right in the respective blocks in Figure 70):
• 4S. SORP LT output to LR input loop, far-end (IDU Switch)
• 1S. SORP LR output to LT input loop, near-end (IDU Switch)
• 12S. SORP RT output to RR input loop, near-end (IDU Switch)
• 14A. IF loop, near-end (IDU A)• 15A. IF loop, near-end (ODU A)
• 16A. RF loop, near-end (ODU A)
• 14B. IF loop, near-end (IDU B)
• 15B. IF loop, near-end (ODU B)
• 16B. RF loop, near-end (ODU B)
Buttons:
Close: Closes the property sheet.
Help: Press this button to get help on the current property sheet page. For
help on an item, click at the top of the dialog box, then click the item.
6.1.2.2 HSB 64Kbit/s Looping
Please refer to Chapter 4.4.2 (this Section).
6.1.2.3 HSB Wayside Looping
Please refer to Chapter 4.4.3 (this Section).
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 275/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 276/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 277/374
B4008 Rev. M 277
Configuration with NEW-Configurator
Automatic Switch Mode
The IDU switch checks the state of both channel A and channel B regularly.
This task decides whether an Rx switch is needed or not. Similarly, the Tx
switching is controlled by the ODU. For the Tx switching to work, the
connected IDU signals the ODU when at least one of the switching criteria
are present on the IDU.
In automatic switch mode the following rule constrain switching:
A channel switch is performed if, and only if, the channel switched to, has
no switch conditions true.
On IDU A and IDU B, a dedicated task is continuously checking whether the
Rx or Tx switch criteria status has changed, and if so, notifies the IDU switch
and ODU about the change.
Currently, bi-directional switching is not implemented in automatic mode.
Switching algorithm
The following algorithm is applied in automatic switching mode:
Compute the total severity factor of each branch (SA, S
B) using the following
formula:
SCenabled1is 1 if the switching criteria “RF Input Alarm” is enabled (checked),
else it is 0. SCactive1 is 1 if the alarm/category “RF Input alarm” is active
(present) on the element, else it is 0.
If SA = S
B, switch to the preferred branch (The preferred branch is set in the
Hot Standby Config page)
If SA > SB, switch to SB if branch A is active.If S
B > S
A, switch to S
A if branch B is active.
Manual Switch Mode
In manual switch mode, bi-directional switching is performed only as a result
of a Q1 message from external management software (e.g. NEW-NMS).
Currently, unidirectional switching is not implemented in manual mode.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 278/374
278 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
6.1.4 Reconfiguring a Hot Standby IDU for
use in 1+0 Configuration
An IDU that has been used in a HSB configuration will continue to be
configured as a HSB element until explicitly reconfigured. To do this, first
disconnect the IDU from the switch. Then use NEW-NMS to connect to
the element with a serial cable. NEW-NMS’ explorer view should nowdisplay an equipment tree with a single node. Bring up the Element ID
dialog from the Configuration menu, and disable the Hot Standby check-
box. When the element is next power cycled, it will start up in 1+0 configu-
ration. This can be verified with the Element ID dialog.
6.1.5 Reconfiguring a 1+0 IDU for
use in Hot StandBy Configuration
If the IDU used in a 1+0 is to be prepared for an IDU in a HSB system, it isvery important to do the following procedure :
1.Connect the HSB cable between the IDUs and the switch
2.Power up the HSB IDU
3.Power up the IDU A and IDU B
The IDUs will now be automatically reconfigured as IDUs used in a HSB
system.
WARNING!
If the Y-cable connectors marked with IDU A and IDU B are
swapped, the IDUs must always be rebooted after this opera-
tion.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 279/374
B4008 Rev. M 279
Fast Ethernet Configuration
CityLink Fast EthernetConfiguration
SECTION VIII
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 280/374
280 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Login as admin with the password; adminpasswd
Hyperterminal & Telnet
1.0 Hyperterminal & Telnet Commands• First time configuration with hyper-terminal to IDU's LCT-
port.
– Settings on com port; 9600, 8, 1, none.
– Terminal emulation; VT100.
• Normal operation via IP.
– Telnet session to IP-address on management port or one of the four
ethernet port’s.
Figure VIII-1 Starting up and logging in
Note!
NEW-NMS' security system has initially one user account:User ID: adminPassword: adminpasswd
It is strongly recommended to change this password!
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 281/374
B4008 Rev. M 281
Fast Ethernet Configuration
2.1 How to get this link alive, parameters
• Enable IP as described in Chapter 4.8.1 (this Section). Enable IP on
one of the four traffic port’s and do settings from NEW-NMS.
– Frequency on both elements must match (Tx to Rx).
– Maximum output power.
– Tune antennas for maximum Rx-levels.
• Verify that transmission is OK over the hop.
– Enable and test on a 2Mb/s or connect with computers on the LAN.
L A N 1
L A N 2
L A N 3
L A N 4
C i t y L i n k I D U
Fas tE the rne tTr ibutaryModu le
2 (1.5) M b/s c i rcu i t 1 - 4
L A N 1
L A N 2
L A N 3
L A N 4
C i t y L i n k I D U
Fas tE the rne tTr ibutaryModu le
2 (1.5) Mb /s c i rcu i t 1 - 4
EthernetExtension
Board(EEB)
EthernetExtension
Board(EEB)
2.2 Testing
• How to verify transmission quality and capacity ?
– One way to do this is to set up two computers and do a file transfer
(FTP) between them over the hop.
One PC working as FTP-server and one as FTP-client, check the
time for transfer of the file and calculate throughput.
Do not have any HUBs connected during this test.
– Stability of the equipment and hop will be easiest monitored on
BER test with pattern-generator on a 2Mb/s.
2.0 How to get this link aliveWhere to start
– Status?
– Do we want a IP connection to the IDU? If you have NEW-NMS, then
the answer is yes.Enable IP one of the four traffic port’s and do all settings from
NEW-NMS.
Figure VIII-2 Radio Connection
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 282/374
282 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
3.0 Top Level Commands
After logon you should have this text on your screen;
Welcome to CityLink.
Copyright (c) Nera ASA.CityLink>
Then type help and press enter:
Welcome to CityLink.
Copyright (c) Nera ASA.
CityLink> help
Help:
The following commands are available:
Command Function
alarms lists alarms
cls clear screen
coldstart shutdown the system and make a cold start of the system
enter enter submenu
env list environment variables
exit exit submenu
gettime display system timezone, time and date
help get help on commands
list list available commands
ping ping the specified host
quit quit shell
reboot shutdown the system and reboot
settime set system timezone, time and date
tracert trace route to target
Use "help <command>" to get help on specific command.
Example for usage of "Help":
CityLink> help gettime
gettime: display system timezone, time and date
Usage: gettime
CityLink>
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 283/374
B4008 Rev. M 283
Fast Ethernet Configuration
3.1 Top Level Commands, Example
CityLink (radio)> alarms
Active alarms:
TIME ID NAME CLASS STATE
Modem.
2001.11.19 11.04.50 1104 E-WARNING WARNING Raised 2001.11.19 11.04.50 1103 LBER MINOR Raised
2001.11.19 11.04.50 1102 HBER MAJOR Raised
Baseband
2001.11.19.11.04.50 32808 LOS_RR MAJOR Raised
2001.11.19.11.04.50 32809 LOF_RR MAJOR Raised
2001.11.19.11.04.50 32811 MS-AIS_INSERT_RR MAJOR Raised
EEB
2001.11.19.11.04.50 32785 ETHERNET_PORT_2 INFO Raised
2001.11.19.11.04.50 32786 ETHERNET_PORT_3 INFO Raised
2001.11.19.11.04.50 32787 ETHERNET_PORT_4 INFO Raised
PerfManager
2001.11.19.11.15.01 3000 G826-15MIN-B1 WARNING Raised
2001.11.20.00.00.01 3003 G826-24HOUR-B1 WARNING Raised
CLIServer 2001.11.20.14.35.20 32782 CONSOLE_USER_LOGGED_IN INFO Raised
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 284/374
284 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.0 Submenu CommandsThe command structure is top level commands and submenu commands.
Top level commands are also available at submenu levels.
The following submenus are available by typing enter and then submenu:
4.1 EEB Submenu
Configuration of Ethernet module
– Enable LAN ports – Select the important LAN port
– Enable 2Mbit/s ports
Submenu commands:Submenu Function Security
Level
eeb monitor and control of EEB passive
baseband perform baseband module commands passive
modem perform modem module commands passive
radio monitor and control of ODU passive
su monitor and control of SU passive
security perform security administration passive
perform monitor and control of Performance data passive
config Lists and modifies configuration settings passive
test perform test function commands passive
fault Query and manipulate alarms and alarm settings active
q1module Lists and modifies q1 and nnp protocol settings master
EEB submenu commands:
Command Function
autopartition enable / disable autopartition
eebstatus show GT-48350 link/partition status
get2mbport get 2MBit E1/T1 port state (from SW Version R1C0this command has been replaced by gettribport)
getethmode get Ethernet ports speed and duplex mode
gettribmode get tributary E1/T1 ports mode
gettribport get tributary E1/T1 port state
getethport get Ethernet port state
getflowctrl get flow control for Ethernet port
listportmib list the MIB-statistics of a port
selectpriport select priority Ethernet port
set2mbport set 2MBit E1/T1 port state (from SW Version R1C0this command has been replaced by settribport)
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 285/374
B4008 Rev. M 285
Fast Ethernet Configuration
4.2 Baseband Submenu
Configuration of IDU
– Enable 2Mbit/s Wayside
– Enable 64kbit/s channels
Baseband submenu commands:
Command Function
get64kg703 get g703 enable/disable
get64kv11 get v11 enable/disable
getlaser get current laser state
getwayside get wayside enable/disable
resetbaseband reset eeb module
set64kg703 set g703 enable/disable
set64kv11 set v11 enable/disablesetlaser sets the laser state
setwayside set wayside enable/disable
startlaser starts the laser
If Flow control is set this will cause a feedback to the “sender” if the port
have to much to do. In this case you will avoid lost or dumped packages and
you may see an improvement of the throughput if “sender” support flow
control!
setethmode set Ethernet port speed and duplex mode
settribmode set tributary E1/T1 ports mode
settribport set tributary E1/T1 port state
setethport set Ethernet port state
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 286/374
286 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.3 Modem Submenu (part of IDU)
validberlevels
– BER = Bit Error Ratio, Number of errored bit’s divided on total number
of bits.
High BER = 1x10-3
Low BER = 1x10-6
Early Warning (BER) = 1x10-9
Settings of FIR and SERF index are set from factory! Do not change them!
Contact Nera to get FIR and SERF index if necessary.
Modem submenu commands
Command Function
getberlevels get HBER, LBER and ER levels
getfirindex get current fir tap index
getserfindex get current serf set index
resetmodem reset modem
setberlevels set HBER, LBER and EW levelssetfirindex set current fir tap index
setserfindex set current serf set index
tempcomp get temperature compensation data
validberlevels show valid HBER, LBER and ER levels
Remember to use NEW-NMS or NEW-Configurator when changing
frequency plan used on the system, because then these setting will be
correct.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 287/374
B4008 Rev. M 287
Fast Ethernet Configuration
4.4 Radio Submenu (part of ODU)
Configuration of ODU
– Set frequency, normally done during installation. However, this will be
necessary to set for spare parts.
Radio submenu commands:Command Function Usage Security
Level
downloadodusw transfer ODU SW No parameters master
from IDU to ODU
drotuning get/set ODU DRO drotuning [disable | tx | rx] master
tuning mode/status
getatpc get Automatic- No parameters passive
PowerControl settings
getfrequency get tx and No parameters passive
rx frequency
getmutestate get radio mute state No parameters passive
getrfpower get rf output No parameters passive
and input power
getrfwarning get RfInputLevel- No parameters passive
Warning up and
down
radiostatus display all No parameters passive
radio settings
reloadfreq transfer current No parameters master frequency settings
to ODU
setatpc set Automatic- setatpc <state | rxref | almoutlevel | almdelay> master
PowerControl state: state <enable | disable>
functions rxref: rxref <level in dBm>
almoutlevel: almoutlevel <level in dBm>
almdelay: almdelay <delay in seconds>
setfrequency set tx and setfrequency <txfreq> <rxfreq> master
rx frequency
setmutestate set radio mute state setmutestate < on | off> master setrfpower set rf output power setrfpower <‘OutputPower in dBm’> master
setrfwarning set RfInputLevel- inputwarning <WarningLevelUp> master
Warning up and <WarningLevelDown>
down
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 288/374
288 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.4.2 Radio Commands, Example of Error Message
CityLink (radio)> setfrequency 22190000 23198000
Frequency out of range!
TxFrequency: 23198000 kHz
RxFrequency: 22190000 kHz
TxFreq.Min : 23086000 kHz
TxFreq.Max : 23534000 kHz
RxFreq.Min : 22078000 kHz
RxFreq.Max : 22526000 kHz
DuplexDistance: 1008000 kHz
CityLink (radio)> setfrequency 23198000 22190000
4.4.1 Radio Status, Example
CityLink (radio)> radiostatus
Radio Configuration
ODU:RF input = -113.00 dBm
ODU:RF output = 14.00 dBm
ODU:+48V = 48.00 VRadio Muted = 0
Loop status = 0
Loop capability = 3
Transceiver S/N = 96
Radio Type = 1
Transceiver Type = 10
Boot Code Version = 1A0
App. Code Version = 4D2
App. Code Date = 2001-12-04 17:04:55
Radio Alarms.
Alarm : 1502 LOS_RF_INPUT
Alarm : 1504 RF_INPUT_WARNING
Tx Frequency = 23198000 kHz
Rx Frequency = 22190000 kHz
Last FrqShift = Ok Tx Frequency Min = 23086000 kHz
Tx Frequency Max = 23534000 kHz
Rx Frequency Min = 22078000 kHz
Rx Frequency Max = 22526000 kHz
Duplex Distance = 1008000 kHz
Rf Output Power = 15 dBm
Rf Output Power Max = 18 dBm
Rf Output Power Min = 8 dBm
Rf Input Warning Low = -60 dBm
Rf Input Warning Up = -35 dBmATPC state = 0
ATPC Rx Ref Level = -10 dBm
ATPC alm Out Level = 15 dBm
ATPC alarm Delay = 12 sec.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 289/374
B4008 Rev. M 289
Fast Ethernet Configuration
4.5 SU Submenu (part of IDU)
Important issues for maintenance and troubleshooting could be to inves-
tigate RF-input level and DC-level in ODU.
SU submenu commands:
Command Functiongetanaloge list analogue sensor measurements
getauxinput list aux port inputs signals and configuartion
getauxoutput list aux port outputs signals and configuration
getfan get fan status
setauxinput configure aux port inputs signals
setauxoutput configure aux port outputs signals
4.6 Security SubmenuIt is important to limit the valid range of IP-addresses to reduce possibility
of “hacking”. It is also recommended to customize the SNMP password
(community strings), also in NEW-NMS.
Security submenu commands:
Command Function
adduser make a new user account
changename change «current user» description namechangepwd change «current user» password
changesnmppwd change SNMP password (community string)
deleteuser delete user account
getiprange list secure IP ranges
getlog list security log
getsnmppwd list SNMP password (community strings)
getuser list users
resetlog resetlog deletes all entries in security log
resetsecurity reset security to factory settingssetiprange set secure IP range
setusername set User description name
setuserpwd set User password
who list users logged on
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 290/374
290 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.7 Performance Submenu
The Performance submenu shows the quality on your received signal from
opposite Citylink.
Perform submenu commands:
Command Function
getfec list FEC counter
getg826 list G.826 performance values
getpulses list error pulses
getthreshold list G.826 Thresholds
performstatus list all performance parameters available
resetfec reset FEC counter
resetg826 reset G.826 performance values
resetpulses reset error pulses
setthreshold set G.826 Thresholds
4.8 Configuration Submenu
Configuration of the CL Element
– Set system type.
– Set section and station address, name etc...
– Important to execute command "setinterface" in order to enable
management via IP.
Config submenu commands:
Command Function
addroute Adds routes to the routing table
authenticate Authenticates access keys to enable licensed functionallity
deleteroute Deletes routes from the routing table
eebni Sets or gets state on EEB network interface
getsysmode Gets the system operation mode
inventory Prints inventory datalistnetconfig Lists the network configuration
listroute Lists the routing table
listsysconfig Lists current system configuration
setantennatype Sets the antennatype
setgateway Sets the default gateway
setinterface Sets the IP address and netmask of an interface
setsectionaddr Sets the section address
setstationaddr Sets the station address
setstationname Sets the station namesetsysconfig Sets system configuration
setsysmode Sets the system operation mode
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 291/374
B4008 Rev. M 291
Fast Ethernet Configuration
4.9 Test & Fault Submenu
Test submenu commands:
Command Functiongetloop get current looping state
setloop toggle looping state on/off
Fault submenu commands:
Command Function
alarmlog lists alarmlog entries
clearalarm clears an alarm
maskalarm masks an alarm
raisealarm raises an alarmunmaskalarm unmasks an alarm
4.8.1 Management Settings
CityLink (config)> setinterface help
Usage: setinterface <if#> < [<ipaddress> <netrmask>] | [<disable>]>
if# : Interface no (1-5)
ipaddress : IP Address
netmask : Subnet Mask
disable : Disable Interface if #
CityLink (config)> setinterface 02 192.168.1.1 255.255.248.0
CityLink (config)> setgateway 192.168.7.15
CityLink (config)> listnetconfig
Network interfaces.
# Address Netmask Description
01 192.168.0.32.1 255.255.255.255 Management port
02 192.168.1.1 255.255.248.0 EEB interface 1
03 Disabled EEB interface 2
04 Disabled EEB interface 3
05 Disabled EEB interface 4
Default gateway : 192.168.7.15
snmpagent Enables or disables the SNMP agent
stationinfo Lists Station/Section info
updatesw Updates the system software
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 292/374
292 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.10 Q1module Submenu
Q1module submenu commands:
Command Function
listinterface List the nnp interfaces
listroutes Lists the nnp routing table
setaddress Set the Q1 address of the element
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 293/374
B4008 Rev. M 293
Fast Ethernet Configuration
5.0 Software Upgrade Procedure for
the CityLink Fast Ethernet Device
1. Download software file to IDU via ftp (1). Note: the filename must be
in 8.3 (xxxxxxxx.eee) format. See Chapter 5.1 (this Section)
2. Log in on console or telnet session to the IDU and in the “config”
submenu issue the command “updatesw [filename]”, where [filename]
is substituted for the name given to the file in step 1.
3. After the file is loaded to flash, reboot the IDU.
Figure VIII-3
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 294/374
294 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
5.1 How to download a file to the IDU:
[host] : is either the host name for your IDU or the IP address in
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format.
5.1.1 Using the Console FTP Client
In a dos prompt go to the folder where your file is stored. Issue thecommand “ftp [host]” and log in with your administrator password. On the
ftp client prompt issue the following commands:
“bin” to enable binary transfers.
“hash” to toggle printing `#' for each buffer transferred
“put [filename]” to transfer the file.
“bye” or “quit” to exit the ftp client.
Figure VIII-4 Downloading using the Console FTP Client
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 295/374
B4008 Rev. M 295
Fast Ethernet Configuration
5.1.2 Using the Internet Explorer
(This requires downloading the browsing enhancements from Microsoft)
Go to the URL “ftp://[host]” and log in with your administrator password.
Drag the software file from a local folder to the Internet explorer window.
Close Internet explorer to terminate the connection
Figure VIII-5 Downloading using the Internet Explorer
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 296/374
296 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
5.2 How to download a file to the ODU
1. Download ODU software file to IDU via ftp. Ref. 5.1 above.
2. Log in on console or telnet session to the IDU and in the “radio” submenu
issue the command “downloadodusw”.
3. After the file is downloaded to ODU, ODU is automatically rebooted.
Figure VIII-6
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 297/374
B4008 Rev. M 297
Fast Ethernet Configuration
NEW Network Management SystemThe management and supervision of CityLink Fast Ethernet may be
performed in various ways depending on the actual application.
• NERA’s NEW-NMS can work as an SNMP-manager and control and
supervise the radio-relay (described in the follwing chapters).• The CityLink Fast Ethernet may be treated as just another LAN device
and controlled and supervised via the built in SNMP agent (described
directly after the NEW-chapters).
• Interfaces: 10Base-T LAN port or one of the 4 Ethernet ports.
6.0 Start NEW-NMS & Connect
First set master as community name.The SNMP Settings configurationsheet can be opened from the Configuration menu. Use same commu-
nity name as in Chapter 4.6 (this Section) Security Submenu.
Figure VIII-7 Setting Community Name in SNMP Settings
Add IP with SNMP checked or specify Search area and do a discover. For
details regarding adding elements and discover; see the NEW-NMS
manual (B1091).
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 298/374
298 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Description:
Get: The community string used during discovery of SNMP
elements NOT defined in any search area.
Set: Default Set community string for elements NOT defined
in any search area.SNMP: The UDP port used as destination port for discovery of
SNMP elements.
Trap: UDP port used by NEW-NMS for receiving Traps.
Start Address: Starting IP address of the range to be searched. Format of
the address must be xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
Stop Address: Stop IP address of the range to be searched. Stop address
must be equal or greater than start address. Format of the
address must be xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
Add an entry to the search area:
1.Press the Add button, an entry is added to the list. By default start address
= «0.0.0.0», stop address = «0.0.0.0», read community = «public», and
write community = «private».
2.To change the default values dobbel click the entry in question and enter
the wanted value.
3.To save your settings press OK.
Remove an entry from the search area:
1.Select the entry from the list.
2.Press the Remove button.
3.To save your settings press OK.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 299/374
B4008 Rev. M 299
Fast Ethernet Configuration
Figure VIII-8 Adding IP Address
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 300/374
300 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
7.0 Network Element ConfigurationConfiguration of Network Elements is achieved using a set of property-
sheets. The property-sheets are modeless, so configuration of several
different modules can be displayed simultaneously.
••••• To open the configuration property sheets:
Select the object you want to view or change either from the Explorer View
or a Map View. Select a Configuration command either from the context
sensitive menu (right mouse-button) or from the Configuration Edit
menu.
The property-sheets are divided into two categories by means of function-
ality:
Figure VIII-9 Buttons on Configuration property sheets with
multiple settings
Configuration Property sheets with Multiple Settings:
The program retrieves the current settings from the Network Element
(NE) when the property-sheet is opened. No set-messages is sent to the
element and no data is modified in program’s data structure before the user
presses one of the property-sheet buttons:
Buttons:
Set: Applies the current settings in the Network Element (NE).
Get: Retrieves the current settings of the Network Element (NE).
Close: Closes the property-sheet without saving or setting any data.
Help: Displays help for the active property-page.
To change the settings:
1 First, get the current settings from the NE by pressing Get. (The
settings are automatically retrieved from the NE when the property-
sheet is opened).
2 Alter the settings you want to change.
3 Press Set to send the changes to the NE.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 301/374
B4008 Rev. M 301
Fast Ethernet Configuration
Configuration Property sheets with Single Interactive Settings:
The program retrieves the current NE settings when the property-sheet is
opened. Has no Get or Set buttons; All functional buttons are placed in the
property-pages. A message is sent to the Network Element immediately
when a control is changed or a button is pressed.
Property-sheet buttons:
Figure VIII-11 Configuration property sheet information field
Figure VIII-10 Buttons on Configuration property sheets with
single active settings
Buttons:
Close: Closes the property-sheet.
Help: Displays help for the active property-page.
All property-pages have an information field at the bottom reflecting the
current status of the data shown in the property-page and the date and time
the property sheet data was retrieved from the Network Element.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 302/374
302 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
8.0 Element Node
8.1 Element Id
The CityLink Element Id property sheet shows main information about the
Network Element like name, type, serial number and different addresses.
The fields with white background can be altered by users with proper user privileges The gray fields are non-editable.
The Element Id configuration sheet can be opened from the Configura-
tion context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Element ID from the Configu-
ration menu.
Figure VIII-12 Element ID Configuration Sheet
Fields: DescriptionSerial Number: The serial number of the NE. (Not editable)
NE Type: The type of NE. (Not editable)
Name: The name of the NE. (max. 32 characters)
Section Address: The section address of the NE.
NE Address: The NE address. Used to identify NEs within a
section.
MAC Address: The Media Access Control address of the NE. (Not
editable)IP Address: The Internet Protocol address of the NE.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 303/374
B4008 Rev. M 303
Fast Ethernet Configuration
8.2 NE Clock
The NE Clock sheet lets you synchronize the Network Element Date/Time
with the NEW-NMS/PC Date/Time. (The NE Clock is set to the same date/
time as the PC Clock)
The NE Clock configuration sheet can be opened from the Configurationcontext menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit NE Clock from the Configura-
tion menu.
Figure VIII-13 NE Clock Configuration Sheet
Fields: Description:
The Element’s Clock: The Date and Time retrieved from the NE.
Difference from The difference between the PC clock and the
NEW-NMS (your PC): NE Clock
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 304/374
304 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
8.3 Software Versions
The software versions property sheet displays the software revisions and
status of the SU and the available subunits
The SW Versions configuration sheet can be opened from the Configu-
ration context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheetcan also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit SW Versions from the Config-
uration menu.
Fields: Description:
SW Component: Software title
Bank: Software location
Revision: Sofware revision. The field will display “unknown”
if the system has this unit present, but is unable toretrieve the information from it.
Status: Valid: Complete or valid software.
Figure VIII-14 SW Versions Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 305/374
B4008 Rev. M 305
Fast Ethernet Configuration
8.4 Production Data
The production data property sheet presents details about the HW compo-
nents within CityLink Fast Ethernet.
The Production Data configuration sheet can be opened from the Con-
figuration context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node inthe Explorer view and then selecting Edit Production Data from the
Configuration menu.
Fields: Description:
InventoryName: The name of the HW component.
InventorySerialNumber: The serial number of the HW component.
InventoryVersion: The HW component version.
Figure VIII-15 Production Data Property Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 306/374
306 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
8.5 SNMP Agent(s) Settings
The SNMP Agent(s) property sheet shows the current SNMP settings. The
Element SNMP Settings configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view.
The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element
node in the Explorer view and then selecting Edit SNMP Settings fromthe Configuration menu. All information presented in the configuration
sheet is set locally and not retrieved from the element.
NOTE! In order for NEW-NMS to manage the SNMP element, the SNMP
Agent settings configured locally must match the settings in the NEW-
NMS. Please see the CityLink Fast Ethernet Agent Configuration.
NEW-NMS is using received traps for keeping an accurate element status.
SNMP Traps are unreliable and no delivery guarantee is given, to over-come this weakness a query for number of traps sent from the SNMP
element must be performed from NEW-NMS at given time intervals. If the
number of traps sent from the element is not equal to the number of traps
received from the element, traps have been lost and alarm synchronization
is needed.
Figure VIII-16 Element SNMP Settings Property Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 307/374
B4008 Rev. M 307
Fast Ethernet Configuration
Columns: Description:
IP address The Internet Protocol address of the
NE (not editable).
Set Community: The community string used when
setting information at the element
(set request).Get Community: The community string used when
retrieving information at the element
(get/getNext request).
Port: Element UDP Port for
Get/Getnext/Set
No. Receivers: Number of Managers set up to receive
traps from this element.(Not used)
••••• Edit values in the list:
The values of the columns SetCommunity, GetCommunity, Port, and
No Trap receiving Managers can be modified:
1. Double click cell to be edited.
2. Type new value.
3. Click outside cell.
4. To save your settings press Set.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 308/374
308 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
8.6 Trap Table
The trap table presents information about the managers currently regis-
tered to receive traps.
The Trap Table configuration sheet can be opened from the Configura-
tion context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in theExplorer view and then selecting Edit Trap Table from the Configu-
ration menu.
Fields: Description:
IP Address: IP address of the registered SNMP manager
trap Port: Which port is used for sending Traps to managersLast access: Time the agent was last accessed by the SNMP manager
Figure VIII-17 Trap Table Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 309/374
B4008 Rev. M 309
Fast Ethernet Configuration
8.7 MIB II - System Group
The System Info property page shows some of the MIB-II System Group
attributes. The fields with white background can be altered by users with
proper user privileges. The gray fields are non-editable.
The MIB II Info configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit MIB II Information from the
Configuration menu.
Figure VIII-18 System Info Property Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 310/374
310 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Description:
Sys Description: A textual description of the entity. This value should
include the full name and version identification of the
system’s hardware type, software operating-system,
and networking software. It is mandatory that this onlycontain printable ASCII characters.
Sys OID: The vendor’s authoritative identification of the
network management subsystem contained in the
entity. This value is allocated within the SMI.
enterprises subtree (1.3.6.1.4.1) and provides an easy
and unambiguous means for determining ‘what kind of
box’ is being managed.
Name: The name of the Network Element.
Location: The physical location of this node (e.g., ‘telephonecloset, 3rd floor’).
Contact: The textual identification of the contact person for
this managed node, together with information on how
to contact this person.
Sys Uptime: The time since the network management portion of the
system was last re-initialized.
••••• To change the settings:
In order for the user to change settings the Set Community name must be
configured as described in SNMP Agent(s) settings.
1 First, get the current settings from the NE by pressing Get. (The
settings are automatically retrieved from the NE when the property-
sheet is opened).
2 Alter the settings you want to change.
3 Press Set to send the changes to the NE.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 311/374
B4008 Rev. M 311
Fast Ethernet Configuration
8.8 MIB-II SNMP Group
The MIB-II SNMP property page presents the performance of the under-
laying SNMP implementation on the managed entity and tracks things such
as the number of SNMP packets sent and received.
A complete description of each field is available by holding the mouse
cursor over wanted item in the dialog and the description found in RFC-1213 will be displayed.
Figure VIII-19 MIB-II SNMP Property Sheet
Fields: Description:
OID Object IDentifier, uniquely defines a managed objects. These
can appear in two forms: numeric (i.e. 1.3.6. 1.2.1.11.1) and
«human readable» (i.e. iso.org.dod.internet.mgmt.mib-
2.snmp.snmpInPkts)
NEW-NMS uses «human readable» form and will display the
above example as snmpInPkts.
Value Value contained in this OID.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 312/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 313/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 314/374
314 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
8.9.1.2 Line Terminal
The different main traffic loops:
All main traffic near end loops are swapped (port 1→ port 2, port 3→ port
4).
Ethernet Loop near end with swap
E1/T1 loops near end
E1/T1 loops far end
Line TX SORP LR out to LT in loop endLine RX SORP LT out to LR in loop near end
Figure VIII-21 Looping Configuration Sheet, Line Terminal
Note! FAR end loop will break management traffic to other side.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 315/374
B4008 Rev. M 315
Fast Ethernet Configuration
8.9.2 Wayside Loops
The different 2 Mbit/s Wayside Loops:
Wayside Loop (far end)
Wayside Loop (near end)
Figure VIII-22 Looping Configuration Sheet, Wayside Channel Tab
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 316/374
316 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
The different 64kbit/s loops:
64kbit/s Channel 1 Loop (far end)
64kbit/s Channel 1 Loop (near end)
64kbit/s Channel 2 Loop (far end)
64kbit/s Channel 2 Loop (near end)
8.9.3 64 kbit/s Loops
Figure VIII-23 Looping Configuration Sheet, 64kbit/s Tab
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 317/374
B4008 Rev. M 317
Fast Ethernet Configuration
9.2 Ethernet Extension Board
The main purpose of the Ethernet Extension Board (EEB) is to convert
Ethernet to/from STM-1 frames. TheEEB also multiplexes 4 E1/T1 channels
into the STM-1 frames.
TheEEBconfiguration sheet can be opened from the Configuration context
menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU node in the Explorer view and then
selectingEdit Ethernet Extension Boardfrom the Configuration menu
9.0 In Door Unit (IDU)
9.1 64 kbit/s Channels
Two 64 kbit/s channels can be inserted into the SOH. Each of the 64kbit/s
channel will occupy one byte of the SOH frame. Both channels can be
retrieved from and inserted into the line and radio side independently.The 64 kbit/s Channels configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting the IDU node in the Explorer view and then
selectingEdit 64 kbit/s Channelsfrom the Configuration menu.
Fields: Choices: Description:
Status: Enabled Enables the 64 kbit/s Channel
Disabled Disables the 64 kbit/s Channel
Direction: Choose the direction the 64 kbit/s Rx channel
should be extracted from.
Line 64 kbit/s Rx is inserted from line SOH frames
Radio 64 kbit/s Rx is inserted from radio SOH frames
Figure VIII-24 64kbit/s Channels Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 318/374
318 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
9.2.1 Ethernet Ports
Figure VIII-25 Ethernet Ports Configuration Sheet
Fields: Description:
portEthStatus This entry enables/disables the port.
portEthFlowCtrl This entry controls flow control setting.
portEthLinkStatus This entry shows the current link status.
portEthPartitionStatus This entry shows the current partiton
status for the port.
portEthLinkSpeed This entry controls the link speed for the port.
portEthLinkDuplex This entry controls the link duplex mode for
the port.
portEthLinkFailureShutdown This entry controls the Link Failure
Shutdown mode for the port.
When enabled port is forced shutdown
due to SDH alarm or remote ETH-port no
Link.
Note: Port is NOT forced shutdown asdescribed above if IP management is
enabled on port.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 319/374
B4008 Rev. M 319
Fast Ethernet Configuration
9.2.2 2 Mbit/s Ports
Configuration of tributary E1/T1 ports (2Mbit/s or 1.5Mbit/s).
Fields: Description:
port2MBIndex Tributary E1/T1 port index .
port2MBStatus Presents the status of the tributary E1/T1 port.
Figure VIII-26 2Mbit/s Ports Configuration Sheet
Priority Port Designates the prioritized port.(Guaranteed
100Mb operation.)
Auto Partition Auto partition state for the EEB ethernet
ports.
Note :Ethernet Port fixed speed / duplex mode setting:
1) Set user terminal equipment speed / duplex mode to Auto.
2) On CityLink FastEthernet port sett required link speed.
Note: It is not recommended to use 10Mb Half duplex .
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 320/374
320 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
9.3 Wayside Channel
A Wayside channel can be inserted in the SOH in either line-direction or
radio-direction. The Wayside channel will occupy 33 bytes (32 bytes data
+ 1 byte alignment information) of the SOH. The Wayside channel use the
Rx and Tx connection at the front panel of the IDU. Rx is received data and
Tx is sent data.The Wayside configuration sheet can be opened from the Configuration
context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also be
invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU node in the Explorer view and
then selecting Edit Wayside from the Configuration menu.
Fields: Options: Description
Status: Enabled Enables the Wayside Channel
Disabled Disables the Wayside Channel
Direction: Line Wayside Rx is extracted from line SOH
Radio Rx is extracted from radio SOH.
Figure VIII-27 Wayside Channel Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 321/374
B4008 Rev. M 321
Fast Ethernet Configuration
9.4 Auxiliary Output
There are four configurable auxiliary output pins in the ALM/AUX port.
The pins are connected to a relay, which can either be controlled manually,
or triggered automatically on a user selectable alarm.
The Auxiliary Output Configuration sheet can be opened from the
Configuration context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view. Thesheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the IDU node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Auxiliary Output from the
Configuration menu.
Figure VIII-28 Auxiliary Output Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 322/374
322 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Controls: Choices: Description:
Output control radio Manual control Set the usage of the auxiliary
buttons: or output pin. (Disabled if the
Alarm triggered CityLink does not support alarm
triggers.)
Manual Relay status Closed or open If the auxiliary output is set to
radio buttons manual control, these buttons
will be enabled, and can be used
to manually control the state of
the relay.
Equipment tree - Displays and selects the alarms
available for alarm triggers. Thiswill be disabled if the auxiliary
output is set to manual control.
Alarm trigger list - Displays the alarm triggers
configured. Disabled if the
auxiliary output is set to
manual control.
Add alarm button - Adds the currently selected
alarm in the equipment tree to
the alarm trigger list. If there is
no selection, or if the selected
tree node doesn’t correspond
to an alarm, nothing happens.
Disabled if the output is on
manual control.
Remove alarm button - Removes the currently select-
ed alarm from the alarm trigger
list. Disabled if the output is on
manual control.
Alarm triggered relay Closed or Open If the auxiliary output is set to
status radio buttons alarm triggered control, these
buttons will be enabled, and can
be used to control the state of the relay when the alarm-
conditions are raised.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 323/374
B4008 Rev. M 323
Fast Ethernet Configuration
9.5 BER Thresholds
The Viterbi decoder is a component using a Viterbi low complexity
algorithm for decoding/error correcting the received bit-sequence in the
NE. The viterbi error rate is used as a quality measurement for the radio
hop.
When the Viterbi error rate exceeds certain values, alarms are generated.
The threshold values decides when alarms are generated. The threshold
values can be changed by the user.
Alarm Id Default value Alarm severity
HBER Indicator for BER >1exp-3 MAJOR
LBER Indicator for LBER >1exp-6 MINOR
EW-BER Indicator for EW-BER >1exp-10 WARNING
Internal proportions: HBER > LBER > EW
The BER Threshold configuration sheet can be opened from the Config-
uration context menu of the Radio node under the IDU node in the
Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting)
the Radio node under the IDU node in the Explorer view and then
selecting Edit BER Threshold from the Configuration menu.
Figure VIII-29 BER Threshold Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 324/374
324 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Choices: Description:
HBER 1.0e-3 - 1.0e-10 Range.
A Major alarm is generated when the
Viterbi error rate exceeds the High BER
threshold value. AIS is inserted when theHBER threshold value is exceeded.
LBER 1.0e-3 - 1.0e-11 Range.
A Minor alarm is generated when the
Viterbi error rate exceeds the Low BER
threshold value.
EW 1.0e-3 - 1.0e-12 Range.
A Warning is generated when theViterbi error rate exceeds the Error
Warning threshold value.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 325/374
B4008 Rev. M 325
Fast Ethernet Configuration
9.6 Laser Control
Available on CityLink Fast Ethernet Line Terminal only.
The optical port may or may not have implemented Automatic Laser
Shutdown (ALS). This is a function designed for eye safety purposes,
according to ITU-T rec. G.958. When implemented, ALS may be enabledor disabled.
When ALS is not implemented or enabled the laser must be turned on/off
manually.
When ALS is enabled, the laser automatically will restart after a waiting
time period (selectable), when having previously been turned off. (If the
section of operation is not connected or Loss Of Optical Signal from far
end is detected, the laser will again be turned off after 2 sec.) The waiting period is by default set to 1 minute.
The Laser Control configuration sheet can be opened from the Config-
uration context menu of the Optical Line node under the IDU node in
the Explorer view. The sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlight-
ing) the Optical Line node under the IDU node in the Explorer view and
then selecting Edit Laser Control from the Configuration menu.
Figure VIII-30 Laser Control Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 326/374
326 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Fields: Buttons: Description:
ALS:
Enabled/Disabled Toggles ALS On/Off
Waiting Time (1.0 - 5.0 minutes ) Specifies waitingtime before the laser is turned on. If
section of operation is connected and
optical signal from far end is present,
laser will remain on, if not laser will
be turned off after 2 seconds.
Get Retrieves Laser Control settings
from the NE.
Set Sends Laser Control settings to the NE.
Restart (2 Seconds) Manually restart the laser for 2 seconds.
Restart (90 Seconds) Manually restart the laser for
90 seconds for testing purposes.
Manual
Control: (ALS disabled or not implemented)
On Manually turn the laser on.
Off Manually turn the laser off.
Status: Shows the status of the Laser Unit.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 327/374
B4008 Rev. M 327
Fast Ethernet Configuration
10.0 Out Door Unit (ODU)
10.1 Antenna Data
This sheet shows some main characteristics of the antenna. Only the
antenna code can be altered. The antenna data are stored in a database file.
The Antenna Data configuration sheet can be opened from the Configu-ration context menu of the Antenna node in the Explorer view. The sheet
can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Antenna node in the
Explorer view and then selecting Edit Antenna from the Configura-
tion menu.
Figure VIII-31 Antenna Data Configuration Sheet
Fields: Description:
Antenna code The antenna code. Unique code for each antenna type.Gain The antenna Gain. (dB) Gain is a measurement of the
antennas ability to transform electrical signals to
electromagnetic waves.
Polarization The polarization direction of the antenna.
FB Front/Back Ratio. Ratio between the Gain in forward
direction and Gain in backward direction.
Diameter The physical antenna diameter. [ Meter]
Frequency range The frequency range where the antenna can be
expected to operate successfully.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 328/374
328 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
10.2 Power Settings
ATPC (Automatic Transceiver Power Control) is a function for effective-
ly reducing the interference probability in your network. The output power
from the transceiver is automatic controlled. If the regulation loop for the
ATPC stops functioning, an alarm is generated. This alarm can be delayed.
The output power should be muted when the frequency setting is changed.The Power Settings configuration sheet can be opened from the Config-
uration context menu of the ODU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the ODU node in the Explorer
view and then selecting Edit Power Settings from the Configuration
menu.
Figure VIII-32 Power Settings Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 329/374
B4008 Rev. M 329
Fast Ethernet Configuration
Fields: Denomination: Description:
RF-INPUT- dBm The upper threshold value for when to
WARNING- generate a RF Input Level Warning
high (Alarm nr. 1504).
RF-INPUT- dBm The lower threshold value for when to
WARNING- generate a RF Input Level Warning
low (Alarm nr. 1504).
Manual dBm The output power level used when ATPC
output level not is activated.
Mute output Mutes the output power. No output power power is sent.
Maximum dBm Maximum output power for
output power transmitting.
Manual Disable ATPC.
Transmit
Output Power
(MTPC)
Automatic Enable ATPC.
Transmit
Output Power
(ATPC)
Reference dBm The wanted input level when ATPC is
input level activated.
Default dBm Set the Power Level to use when an
output level ATPC alarm occurs.
ATPC alarm seconds The ATPC alarm can be delayed a
delay certain number of seconds.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 330/374
330 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
10.3 Frequency Settings
The Duplex Distance between the Rx and Tx band is fixed. The user can set
the Tx frequency by clicking on the frequency slots. Since the duplex
distance is fixed the Rx frequency will be automatically set. The corre-
sponding Tx and Rx frequency must be set in the opposite NE.
NEW-NMS/-Configurator receives the frequency plan from the NE.
When no NE is connected (off-line) no frequency plan will be shown.
The output power should be muted when the frequency setting is changed.
The Frequency configuration sheet can be opened from the Configura-
tion context menu of the ODU node in the Explorer view. The sheet can
also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the ODU node in the Explorer
view and then selecting Edit Frequency from the Configuration
menu.
Figure VIII-33 Frequency Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 331/374
B4008 Rev. M 331
Fast Ethernet Configuration
Fields: Denomination: Description:
Frequency plan Choose the wanted frequency plan.
The frequency plan must.
correspond to your transceiver.
TX Frequency MHz The used Tx Carrier frequency.RX Frequency MHz The used Rx Carrier frequency.
Coding TCM or TCM+RS The coding scheme
Modulation The modulation scheme used with
this frequency plan.
Data rate STM-1 or STM-0
Channel spacing MHz The distance between the channels
in this frequency plan.
Duplex Distance MHz The distance between the Tx and
the Rx carrier frequency.Innermost MHz The distance between the highest
spacing frequency in lower half and the low-
est frequency in the upper half of
the frequency plan.
Compensation Digital filters in the Modem Board
filter compensating for RF Filter and
branching characteristics.
TX Frequency MHz Tx Lower sideband frequency for
Band, Min this frequency plan.
TX Frequency MHz Tx Upper sideband frequency for
Band, Max this frequency plan.
RX Frequency MHz Rx Lower sideband frequency for
Band, Min this frequency plan.
RX Frequency MHz Rx Upper sideband frequency for
Band, Max this frequency plan.
Status The result of the last frequency
change operation (unknown, ok,executing, failed).
Reset Modem When this item is checked the
modem will be reset when applying
selected frequency data. Only to be
used when changing frequency plan.
NOTE!
Both the IDU and the ODU must be rebooted after a change of frequency and/
or Reed Solomon code. This is done by disconnecting and reconnecting
power to the IDU.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 332/374
332 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
11.0 Performance
11.1 G826 Performance
G.826 is an ITU-T quality recommendation for SDH networks.
The Network Element has several registers for collecting G.826 perform-
ance data. The G.826 data is divided into three categories; G.826 15min,G.826 Day and G.826 Month and they show the B1 measurements for 16
periods of the category. (4 hours of 15min data, 16 days and 16 months are
available in the NE).
The G-826 Performance configuration sheet can be opened from the
Performance context menu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The
sheet can also be invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in
the Explorer view and then selecting Performance Registers from the
Main menu.
Figure VIII-34 G-826 Performance Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 333/374
B4008 Rev. M 333
Fast Ethernet Configuration
Fields: Description:
Time interval The interval of the measurement (15 min., day, month).
Period The sequence number of the performance register.
Register 0 is the running measurement, register 1 is the
latest completed measurement.SES Severely Errored Seconds. The number of one-second
periods which contains > 30% errored blocks or at least
one Severely Disturbed.
UAS The number of UnAvailable Seconds. A period of un-
available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SES
events. These ten seconds are considered to be a part of
the unavailable time. A new period of available time
begins at the onset of ten consecutive non-SES events.
These 10 seconds are considered to be part of availabletime.
BBE The number of Background Block Errors. An errored
block not occurring as part of an SES.
ES Errored Second. The number of one second periods
with one or more errored blocks.
Start Time The start time of the measurement period.
Status Status of the counter.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 334/374
334 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
11.2 Port Performance
The Repeater port information property sheet presents performance and
error statistics for the individual ports on the Network Element. Each
entry in the table contains information for a single port. The data are
gathered from the RFC-2108 MIB.
The Port Performance configuration sheet can be opened from the
Performance context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view.
Fields : Description:
Readable frames Please refer to RFC-2108 MIB.
Readable octets Please refer to RFC-2108 MIB.Runts Please refer to RFC-2108 MIB.
Late events Please refer to RFC-2108 MIB.
Autopartition Please refer to RFC-2108 MIB.
Total errors Please refer to RFC-2108 MIB.
Figure VIII-35 Port Performance Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 335/374
B4008 Rev. M 335
Fast Ethernet Configuration
11.3 Repeater Performance
The Repeater Information Property sheet presents Ethernet performance.
The figures presented are based on the performance of every port on the
Network Element. Each entry in the table contains information about a
single non-trivial repeater.The data are gathered from the RFC-2108 MIB.
The Repeater Performance configuration sheet can be opened from the
Performance context menu of the IDU node in the Explorer view.
Fields: Description:
Tx Collisions Please refer to RFC-2108 MIB.Total Frames Please refer to RFC-2108 MIB.
Total errors Please refer to RFC-2108 MIB.
Total octets Please refer to RFC-2108 MIB.
Figure VIII-36 Repeater Performance Configuration Sheet
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 336/374
336 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
12.0 Fault
12.1 NE Alarm Log
The NE Alarm Log property sheet displays the settings and content of the
NE alarm log.
The NE Alarm Log configuration sheet can be opened from the contextmenu of the Element node in the Explorer view. The sheet can also be
invoked by selecting (highlighting) the Element node in the Explorer
view and then selecting NE Log Manager from the Fault menu.
When pressing View in the NE Alarm Log Manager, a dialog box is
displayed prompting for the number of records to retrieve.
Controls: Options: Description:
Log full action Wrap or Halt Actions to take when the log is full.
Max. number - The number of entries theNE alarm
of events log can hold.Number of events - Current number of log entries.
Figure VIII-37 NE Alarm Log Configuration Sheet
Figure VIII-38 Number of Records Dialog Box
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 337/374
B4008 Rev. M 337
Fast Ethernet Configuration
13.0 Security
13.1 Security Log
CityLink Fast Ethernet has an internal security log that can contain up to
1000 events. To view the local security log, select a CityLink Fast Ethernet
object (in a map or explorer view), and select the NE Security Logcommand either from the context menu or from the Security main menu.
Fields: Description:
Security Log Index The index of the Security log
Security log entry text A descriptive text of the event.
Security log entry time The time of the event.
Figure VIII-39 Security Log
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 338/374
338 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
SNMP & MIB Description
14.0 General• SNMP = Simple Network Management Protocol
– Open internet protocol, requires IP connection.
• MIB = Media Information Base
– File describing all details about the equipment.
– This file must be copied into SNMP-manager
15.0 Supported MIB’s
The CityLink Fast Ethernet embedded application supports the following
MIBs
Name Description Defined in
NERA-FAST-ETHERNET-MIB Specific management Nera_Clip.mib
of CityLink Fast
Ethernet devices.
NERA-MIB General management Nera.mib
of Nera radio
equipment.
SNMP-REPEATER-MIB General management/ RFC 2108
monitoring of
repeater units.
RFC1213-MIB (mib2) General management RFC 1213
of network devices.
NERA-FAST-ETHERNET-MIB purposes:
• To support common management task through SNMP.• To provide network management with an acceptable security level.
• To support industry standard MIB definitions where appropriate.
• To create a modular MIB design to reflect the modularity of the agent
software.
• To facilitate future updates and configuration changes.
• To conform to the established conventions of the “NERA-MIB” MIB.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 339/374
B4008 Rev. M 339
Fast Ethernet Configuration
16.0 MIB OverviewThe MIB is separated into 8 sub-modules as shown below.
Figure VIII-40 MIB Overview
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 340/374
340 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
16.1 Unit
This unit contains entries related to overall system properties. This
includes system time, status, transmission settings and management
addressing
Figure VIII-41 MIB Sub-modules, Unit
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 341/374
B4008 Rev. M 341
Fast Ethernet Configuration
16.2 IDU
This module provides configuration and monitoring of IDU hardware
interfaces. This includes the Ethernet ports, 2Mbit/s ports, 64kbit/s ports
and the auxiliary port. The module also contains the global error level
limits for the IDUs data inputs.
Figure VIII-42 MIB Sub-modules, IDU
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 342/374
342 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
16.3 ODU
This module contains the ODU specific control settings and operational
status. The ODU functional capabilities are obtainable through the “capa-
bilities” sub module.
Figure VIII-43 MIB Sub-modules, ODU
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 343/374
B4008 Rev. M 343
Fast Ethernet Configuration
16.4 Test Manager
This Module provides means to perform test functions on the equipment.
The design provides an extensible way of generating traffic loops on
various interfaces and test points. It is possible at run time to query for
possible loop settings and perform tests without previous knowledge of
the test loops provided by the equipment.
Figure VIII-44 MIB Sub-modules, Test Manager
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 344/374
344 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
16.5 Performance Manager
The module provides means of access to traffic performance data. The
current design only supports the G826 B1 measurement type but the
layout of the module makes feasible to extend this in future versions.
Figure VIII-45 MIB Sub-modules, Performance Manager
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 345/374
B4008 Rev. M 345
Fast Ethernet Configuration
16.6 Fault Manager
This module is an extension to the fault management framework defined
by the “NERA-MIB” specification. It supplies an extension to the previous
fault log which is more configurable than the previous. In addition it
supplies new functionality where a manager can query all supported alarm
types from the equipment and retrieve descriptions and node informationfor each one. This will reduce the linking between the management
software and the agent considerable.
Figure VIII-46 MIB Sub-modules, Fault Manager
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 346/374
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 347/374
B4008 Rev. M 347
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
SECTION IX
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 348/374
348 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
1.0 GeneralThis Section describes two ways of troubleshooting; by means of LEDS
located at the In Door Unit's front panel and by means of NEW-NMS
Configurator.
2.0 Description of Alarm LEDs
2.1 IDU Alarm LEDs
The functions of the alarm LEDs are as follows:
CRITICAL Red Will be activated when one or more
critical alarms are activated
MAJOR Red Will be activated when one or moremajor alarms are activated
MINOR Red Will be activated when one or more
minor alarms are activated
WARNING Orange Will be activated when one or more
warnings are activated
POWER ON Green Will be on when main power is > 39V
2.2 HSB-IDU Alarm LEDs and Switch Indicators
The functions of the alarm LEDs are as follows:
CRITICAL Red Will be activated when one or more
critical alarms are activated
MAJOR Red Will be activated when one or more
major alarms are activated
MINOR Red Will be activated when one or more
minor alarms are activated
WARNING Orange Will be activated when one or morewarnings are activated
PWR 1 Green Will be on when main power is > 39V
PWR 2 Green Will be on when main power is > 39V
The functions of the Switch indicators are as follows:
RX DIRA Green Will be on when receiving on A-branch
RX DIRB Green Will be on when receiving on B-branch
TX DIRA Green Will be on when transmitting on A-branchTX DIRB Green Will be on when transmitting on B-branch
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 349/374
B4008 Rev. M 349
Troubleshooting
2.3 LEDs on Line Interface Plug-in Boards
G.703 Line interface:
Green LED is activated when input signal is present.
Multimode Fiber Line interface:
Green LED is activated when input signal is present.
Singelmode Fiber Line interfaces (1310 Nm and 1550 Nm):
Green LED is activated when input signal is present.
CAT-5 UTP Line interface:
Bicolor LED. Emits red when input signal is present and loss of frame
(LOF) alarm is activated. Emits green when input is normal and LOF is low.
3.0 Troubleshooting by NEW-NMS Configurator
3.1 Introduction
Fault management is the process of locating and correcting network
problems or faults. Fault management is possibly the most important task
in network management. It consists of identifying the occurrence of afault, isolating the cause of the fault and correcting it if possible. The fault
management increases the network reliability by giving the network
operator a tool that quickly detects problems and initiates recovery
procedures.
NEW contains functions for acquisition, presentation and storage of
alarms and events from the network to be managed.
3.2 Information Acquisition
In order to detect faults, information must be gathered from the network.
The state of the network is monitored using two different methods.
3.2.1 Polling
The various network elements should be polled on a regular basis, so that
changes in Network Elements (NE) are detected and network connectivity
is checked. Which NE to poll, the polling rate and what to be polled for aspecific NE is user definable.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 350/374
350 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
3.2.2 Event Notification
In addition to polling, some NEs have the ability to spontaneously report
events. The NEW will gather this information in addition to polling. This
feature will decrease the managers response time to network events
considerably.
3.3 Alarm Presentation
In all views, where network information is presented, colors are used to
indicate the alarm severity status of the NEs. To easily identify the status
of the NEs, all alarms are classified according to their severity. Each alarm
severity class has a color. In the different views, the NEs change colors
according to the color of their most severe alarm. The alarm classifica-
tions are described in the table below.
Severity Colour Description
(default)
Normal Green No alarms or warning have been reported
from the NE.
Warning Yellow Indicates the detection of a potential or
impending service-affecting fault, before any
significant affects have been felt. Action
should be taken to further diagnose and
correct the problem in order to prevent itfrom becoming a more serious service-
affecting fault.
Minor alarm Dark Yellow Indicates the existence of a non-service-
affecting fault condition and that corrective
action should be taken in order to prevent a
more serious fault.
Major alarm Orange Signifies that a service-affecting condition
has occurred and urgent corrective action is
required.
Critical alarm Red The most severe alarm. It signifies that a
service-affecting condition has occurred and
an immediate corrective action is required.
No contact Blue Indicates that no contact is achieved with the
NE. The communication settings should be
checked in order to obtain contact with the
element.
Misconfigured Magenta The NE has not been properly configured.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 351/374
B4008 Rev. M 351
Troubleshooting
3.4 Visual Alarm Notification
There are four different ways of monitoring alarms in NEW. These methods
are described in the following subchapters. The NEW context sensitive help
system offers a more comprehensive support on all features in the NEW
program.
3.4.1 Alarms on a Tree node/leaf in the Explorer view
The Explorer View is opened by selecting Explore Net from the View Menu.
Figure IX-1 shows an example of the Explorer view.
The Explorer View shows the Network information in a logical manner. Each
NE is divided into two main branches; a Transmission branch and an
Equipment branch. The sub-branches and leaves under the Transmission
branch concern the transmission aspects of the NE. The sub-branches andleaves under the Equipment branch concern the physical equipment of the
NE.
Figure IX-1 Example of Explorer View
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 352/374
352 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
The Explorer view use the severity colours to indicate alarm events. The
alarms are presented in a hierarchical manner. The colour of the most
severe alarm is inherited from the leaf where the alarm was identified, to
all branch leaves up to the section symbol. E.g. the section and NE symbols
will always show the alarm colour of the most severe alarm identified in
the sub-branches in the Explorer view.
By pressing the right mouse button on any nodes/leaves in the Explorer
View and selecting Current Alarms from the context menu, a Current
Alarm List (ref. Appendix III) is opened showing all alarms Hierarchical
below the selected leaf.
3.4.2 Alarms on a Node symbol in the Map view
The Map View is opened by selecting Map Navigator from the ViewMenu. Follow the instructions in the Help file to create a map. Figure IX-
2 shows an example of the view.
The Map View shows the Network information in a physical manner. Each
NE is showed as an NE icon. Graphic-files can be added as background
images in the view. NE icons grouped together with bindings form
networks. The NE icons change their severity colours according to the
current most severe alarm of the NE.
Figure IX-2 Example of Map View
By pressing the right mouse button on a NE icon in the Map View and
selecting Alarms from the context menu, a Current Alarm List (ref.
Appendix III) is opened showing all alarms of the NE.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 353/374
B4008 Rev. M 353
Troubleshooting
3.4.3 Viewing Alarms in the Current Alarms View
TheCurrent Alarm Viewcan be opened by selectingCurrent Alarms from
the Fault Menu. Figure IX-3 shows an example of the Current Alarms List.
Each alarm is listed as a row in the list as shown in Table IX-1.
The Current Alarms List can also be opened from both the Explorer Viewand the Map View by selecting Current Alarms from the right-mouse-
button-click context menu. The filter is then automatically set up to show
only the alarms hierarchically below the node/leaf the alarm list was
opened from.
Figure IX-3 Example of Current Alarms
Fields Description
Severity The severity of the alarm
Alarm text A short description of the alarmNode The name of the node where the alarm occurred
Table IX-1 Fields in the Current Alarms List
Alarms can also be logged to files. Consult the NEW NMS Manual or the
NEW NMS Help system for further information.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 354/374
354 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
4.0 Cable FaultIf a cable fault is indicated, it indicates that the microprocessor communica-
tions between the IDU and ODU have failed. The fault is most probably with
the cable connection. It may be open or shorted. Disconnect the cable from
the IDU and leave the ODU connected. Measure the DC cable resistance between the centre pin and the outer conductor of the N-type connector
terminating the cable by means of a multi-meter.
If resistance is in the order of some hundreds k ΩΩΩΩΩ to a few MΩΩΩΩΩ:
Probably no cable fault.
Replace IDU or ODU, one at the time. If alarm persists, swap the replaced unit
for the original and replace the other unit.
If resistance is less than some hundreds k ΩΩΩΩΩ:Probably cable or connector damage. Check the cable and connectors at both
ends for defects or for reasons that would cause the problem. Remeasure
DC resistance, now with both cable ends disconnected. The resistance
should be “open circuit” and if not replace the entire cable run, terminating
with new N-type connectors.
If resistance is immeasurable (high impedance):
Typically reasons are connectors not terminated correctly or cable cut.
Check the cable and connectors at both ends for defects or for reasons thatwould cause the problem. Remeasure DC resistance, with the outer end
still connected to the ODU. If still immeasurable impedance, replace the
entire cable run, terminating with new N-type connectors.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 355/374
B4008 Rev. M 355
Appendices
Appendices
SECTION X
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 356/374
356 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Appendix I: IDU / HSB-IDU Interface Description
Figure X-1 CityLink IDU
P O
W E R
C o n n e c t o r : P O W E R D - S U B 2 - P I N
C a b l e : U W M K 5 0 5 1
P H O N E
C o n n e c t o r : R J - 4 5 8 - P I N
K i t : 4 C Z 5
H o t S t a n d b y I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n
C o n n e c
t o r : 6 8 - P I N V H D C I r e c e p t a c l e
C a b l e :
8 7 W 5 0 6 6 - 1 A
6 4
k b i t / s S E R V I C E C H A N N E L ( G . 7 0 3
)
C o
n n e c t o r : R J 4 5 8 - P I N
C a
b l e : U W M K 3 0 7 7
L O C A L C R A F T T E R M I N A L ( R S 2 3 2 )
C o n n e c t o r : D - S U B 9 - P I N M
A L E
C a b l e : U W M K 3 1 2 3
S A
F E T Y
G R
O U N D
O D
U I N T E R F A C E
N - T Y P E F E M A L E
A L A R M & A U X I L L A R
Y F U N C T I O N S
C o n n e c t o r : D - S U B 2 5 - P I N F E M A L E
C a b l e : U W M K 3 0 7 6
6 4 k b i t / s S E R V I C E C H A N N E L ( V . 1 1 )
C o n n e c t o r : R J 4 5 8 - P I N
C a b l e : U W M K 3 0 7 7
- 4 8 V D C
6 4 k b
/ s
G . 7 0
3
2 M b / s
W a y s i d e
S V C E
E x t . 1
P h o n e
6 4 k b
/ s
V . 1 1
2 M H z
S y n c .
S V C E
E x t . 2
1 0 B a s e T
L A N
I D U - H S B I N T F C
C A L L
A L M & A U
X
L C T
N I 2
N I 1
C R I T I C A L
M A J O R
M I N O R
W A R N I N G
P O W E R
1 5 5 M b / s L I N E
2 M
b i t / s W A Y S I D E C H A N N E L
C o
n n e c t o r : R J 4 5 8 - P I N
C a
b l e : 8 7 W 5 0 9 7 - 2 A , 1 0 m p a t c h c a b l e
2 M
H z S Y N C
( L a t e r r e l e a s e )
1 0 B a s e T E t h e r n e t
O f f t h e s h e l f s t a n d
a r d
e t h e r n e t c a b l e
S E R V I C E C H A N N E L E X
T E N S I O N 1
C o n n e c t o r : R J - 4 5 8 - P I N
C a b l e : 8 7 W 5 0 9 7 - 1 A
S E R V I C E C H A N N E L E X
T E N S I O N 2
C o n n e c t o r : R J - 4 5 8 - P I N
C a b l e : 8 7 W 5 0 9 7 - 1 A
S l o t f o r o p t i o n a l L i n e
I n t e r f a c e P l u g - I n B o a r d
R e f . F i g . X - 6
C O L L E C T I V E C A L L
S l o t f o r o p t i o n a l
E x t e n s i o n B o a r d
P W R
N E T W O R K I N T E R F A C E ( R S 4 8 5 )
C o n n e c t o r : D - S U B 9 - P I N
F E M A L E
C a b l e : U W M K 3 0 7 8 , U W M K 3 0 7 9
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 357/374
B4008 Rev. M 357
Appendices
Figure X-2 CityLink HSB-IDU
P O
W E R
C o n n e c t o r : P O W E R D - S U B 2 - P I N
C a b l e : U W M K 5 0 5 1
P H O N E
C o n n e c t o r : R J - 4 5 8 - P I N
K i t : 4 C Z 5
H o t S t a n d b y I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n
C o n n e c t o r : 6 8 - P I N V H D C I r e c e p t a c l e
C a b l e : 8 7 W 5 0 6 6 - 1 A
6 4
k b i t / s S E R V I C E C H A N N E L ( G . 7 0 3 )
C o
n n e c t o r : R J 4 5 8 - P I N
C a
b l e : U W M K 3 0 7 7
L O C A L C R A F T T E R M I N A L ( R S 2 3 2 )
C o n n e c t o r : D - S U B 9 - P I N M A L E
C a b l e : U W M K 3 1 2 3
S A
F E T Y
G R
O U N D
A L A R M & A U X I L L A R
Y F U N C T I O N S
C o n n e c t o r : D - S U B 2
5 - P I N F E M A L E
C a b l e : U W M K 3 0 7 6
6 4 k b i t / s S E R V I C E C H A N N E L ( V . 1 1 )
C o
n n e c t o r : R J 4 5 8 - P I N
C a b l e : U W M K 3 0 7 7
- 4 8 V D C
6 4 k b / s
G . 7 0 3
2 M b / s
W a y s i d e
S V C E
E x t . 1
P h o n e
6 4 k b / s
V . 1 1
2 M H z
S y n c .
S V C E
E x t . 2
1 0 B a s e T
L A N
I D U - H S B I N T F C
C A L L
A L M & A U X
L C T
N I 2
N I 1
C R I T I C A L
M A J O R
M I N O R
W A R N I N G
P O W E R 2
1 5 5 M b / s L I N E
1
2 M
b i t / s W A Y S I D E C H A N N E L
C o
n n e c t o r : R J 4 5 8 - P I N
C a
b l e : 8 7 W 5 0 9 7 - 2 A , 1 0 m p a t c h c a b l e
2 M
H z S Y N C
( L a t e r r e l e a s e )
1 0 B a s e T E t h e r n e t
O f f t h e s h e l f s t a n d
a r d
e t h e r n e t c a b l e
S E R V I C E C H A N N E L E X T E N S I O N 1
C o n n e c t o r : R J - 4 5 8 - P I N
C a b l e : 8 7 W 5 0 9 7 - 1 A
S E R V I C E C H A N N E L E X
T E N S I O N 2
C o n n e c t o r : R J - 4 5 8 - P I N
C a b l e : 8 7 W 5 0 9 7 - 1 A
S l o t f o r o p t i o n a l L i n e
I n t e r f a c e P l u g - I n B o a r d
R e f . F i g . X - 6
R X D I R . A
R X D I R . B
T X D I R . A
T X D I R . B
C O L L E C T I V E C A L L
S l o t f o r o p t i o n a l
E x t e n s i o n B o a r d
P O W E R 1
2
P W R
N E T W O R K I N T E R F A C E ( R S 4 8 5 )
C o n n e c t o r : D - S U B 9 - P I N
F E M A L E
C a b l e : U W M K 3 0 7 8 , U W M
K 3 0 7 9
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 358/374
358 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
O D U
- 4 8 V D C
6 4 k b / s
G . 7 0 3
2 M b / s
W a y s i d e
S V C E
E x t . 1
P h o n e
6 4 k b / s
V . 1 1
2 M H z
S y n c .
S V C E
E x t . 2
1 0 B a s e T
L A N
I D U - H S B I N T F C
C A L L
A L M & A U X
L C T
N I 2
N I 1
P O W E R
1 5 5 M b / s L I N E
P W R
1 0 B a s e - T / 1 0 0 B a s e - T X
T 1 / E 1
S I G N A L
S I G N A L
C R I T I C A L
M A J O R
M I N O R
W A R N I N G
P O
W E R
C o
n n e c t o r : P O W E R D - S U B 2 - P I N
C a
b l e : U W M K 5 0 5 1
P H O N E
N o t u s e d f o r C i t y L i n k F a s t E
t h e r n e t
H o t S t a n d b y I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n
N o t u s e
d f o r C i t y L i n k F a s t E t h e r n e t
N E T W O R K I N T E R F A C E ( R
S 4 8 5 )
N o t u s e d f o r C i t y L i n k F a s t E t h
e r n e t
6 4 k b i t / s S E R V I C E C H A N N E L ( G . 7 0 3
)
C
o n n e c t o r : R J 4 5 8 - P I N
C
a b l e : U W M K 3 0 7 7
L O C A L C R A F T T E R M I N A L ( R S 2 3
2 )
C o n n e c t o r : D - S U B 9 - P I N M A L E
C a b l e : U W M K 3 1 2 3
S A
F E T Y
G R O U N D
O D U I N T E R F A C E
N - T Y P E F E M A L E
A L A R M & A U X I L L A
R Y F U N C T I O N S
C o n n e c t o r : D - S U B
2 5 - P I N F E M A L E
C a b l e : U W M K 3 0 7 6
6 4
k b i t / s S E R V I C E C H A N N E L ( V . 1 1 )
C o n n e c t o r : R J 4 5 8 - P I N
C a b l e : U W M K 3 0 7 7
2 M b i t / s W A Y S I D E C H A N N E L
C
o n n e c t o r : R J 4 5 8 - P I N
C
a b l e : 8 7 W 5 0 9 7 - 2 A , 1 0 m p a t c h c a b l e
2 M H z S Y N C
( L
a t e r r e l e a s e )
1 0 B a s e T E t h e r n e t
O f f t h e s h e l f s t a n d a r d
e t h e r n e t c a b l e
S E R V I C E C H A N N E L E X T E N S I O N 1
N o t u s e d f o r C i t y L i n k F a s t E t h e r n e t
S E R V I C E C H A N N E L E X
T E N S I O N 2
N o t u s e d f o r C i t y L i n k F a s t E
t h e r n e t
C O L L E C T I V E C A L L
N o t u s e d f o r C i t y L i n k
F a s t E t h e r n e t
S l o t f o r o p t i o n a l L i n e
I n t e r f a c e P l u g - I n B o a r d
R e f . F i g . X - 6
1 0 B a s e - T / 1 0 0 B a s e
- T X E t h e r n e t
O f f t h e s h e l f s h i e l d
e d t w i s t e d
p a i r e t h e r n e t c a b l e
T R I B U T A R Y T 1 / E 1 I N T E R F A C E ( 2 M b i t / s o r 1 . 5 M b i t / s )
C o n n e c t o r : R J 4 5 8 - P I N
C a b l e : 8 7 W 5 0 9 7
- 2 A , 1 0 m p a t c h c a b l e
Figure X-3 CityLink Fast Ethernet IDU
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 359/374
B4008 Rev. M 359
Appendices
INP
G.703
OUT
INP
MM Fiber
INP
SM Fiber
OUT INP
CAT-5 UTP
INP
Figure X-4 Optional Line Interface Plug-in Boards
155 Mbit/s STM-1
G.703, 75ΩΩΩΩΩ
Connector : DIN47297, 1.0/2.3mm
Cable : UWMH3080
155 Mbit/s STM-1
CAT-5, UTP
Connector: RJ45 (FCC-8 compl.), 8-pin Connector
Cable alt.1: 87W5111-CAT5E02S, 2m straight patch cable
Cable alt.2: 87W5111-CAT5E02C, 2m crossed patch cable
1310 nm SMF and 1550 nm SMF
Optical Interface
Connector: LC
Cable: 87W5080-SCxx/LCxx/FCxx
1310 nm MMF
Optical Interface
Connector: MT-RJ
Cable: 87W5078-SCxx/MTRJxx/STxx/FCxx
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 360/374
360 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Figure X-5 Optional Extension Boards Boards
Optional Extension Boards
TRIBUTARY
OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN
DS1-0 DS3/E3-1 DS3/E3-2 DS3/E3-3SIGNAL
0
1
23
Line ExtensionSTM1 / STS-3 (155Mb/s)
G.703
INP OUT
21x2Mbit/s Extension Board:
STM1 Extension Board:
DS3/E3 Extension Board:
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 361/374
B4008 Rev. M 361
Appendices
Pin no. 8Pin no. 1
Pin no. 8 Pin no. 1
Power Connector
0V STATION GROUND
-48VDC
Figure X-6 IDU Power Connector Pinout
RJ-45 Connectors
With reference to Figure X-7, several connector pin-outs will be described.
Note that the upper connector pins are reversed with respect to the lower
connector pins, i.e. the lower plug is “mirrored”. Refer to Figure X-1-3 for
location of 2-by-4 port RJ-45.
IN DOOR UNIT'SFRONT VIEW
Figure X-7 RJ-45 (P5001A-D) connector detail.
A B C D
U
L
IN DOOR UNIT'S
FRONT VIEW
(FEMALE )
(MALE )
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 362/374
362 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
64kbit/s G.703 Jack, RJ-45 Connector
Pin. no: Function:
1UA TxD- (Neg. Tx. data)2UA TxD+ (Pos. Tx. data)
3UA TxC+ (Pos. Tx. clock)4UA TxC- (Neg. Tx. clock)5UA RxD+ (Pos. Rx. data)6UA RxD- (Neg. Rx. data)7UA RxC+ (Pos. Rx. clock)8UA RxC- (Neg. Rx. clock)
Table X-1 64kbit/s G.703 Jack, 8-PIN Pinout
64kbit/s V.11 Jack, RJ-45 Connector
Pin. no: Function:
1LA TxD- (Neg. Tx. data)2LA TxD+ (Pos. Tx. data)3LA TxC- (Neg. Tx. clock)4LA TxC+ (Pos. Tx. clock)
5LA RxD- (Neg. Rx. data)6LA RxD+ (Pos. Rx. data)7LA RxC- (Neg. Rx. clock)8LA RxC+ (Pos. Rx. clock)
Table X-2 64kbit/s V.11 Jack, 8-PIN Pinout
2Mbit/s Wayside Jack, RJ-45 Connector
Pin. no: Function:
1UB IND+ (Pos. Rx. data)2UB IND- (Neg. Rx. data)3UB shield4UB OUTD+ (Pos. Tx. data)5UB OUTD- (Neg. Tx data)6UB shield7UB Not Connected
8UB Not Connected
Table X-3 2Mbit/s Wayside Jack, 8-PIN Pinout
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 363/374
B4008 Rev. M 363
Appendices
2.048 MHz SYNC Jack, RJ-45 Connector
Pin. no: Function:
1LB INP+ (Pos. Rx. pulse)2LB INP- (Neg. Rx. pulse)
3LB shield4LB OUTP+ (Pos. Tx. pulse)5LB OUTP- (Neg. Tx pulse)6LB shield7LB Not Connected8LB Not Connected
Table X-4 2.048 MHz SYNC Jack, 8-PIN Pinout
Service Channel Extension 1 and 2 Jacks, RJ-45 Connector
Pin. no: Function:
1UC OE1_INP_A2UC OE1_INP_B3UC OE1_OUT_A4UC OE1_OUT_B5UC CALL_INP
6UC CALL_OUT7UC CTRL_INP8UC CTRL_OUT
Table X-5 Service Channel Extension 1 Jack, 8-PIN Pinout
Pin. no: Function:
1LC OE2_INP_A2LC OE2_INP_B3LC OE2_OUT_A4LC OE2_OUT_B5LC CALL_INP6LC CALL_OUT7LC CTRL_INP8LC CTRL_OUT
Table X-6 Service Channel Extension 2 Jack, 8-PIN Pinout
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 364/374
364 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Service Phone Jack, RJ-45 Connector
Pin. no: Function:
1UD Not Connected2UD Not Connected
3UD TELA4UD MIC+5UD MIC-6UD TELB7UD Not Connected8UD LOOP_OE
Table X-7 Service Phone Handset Connector, 8-PIN Pinout
10Base-T (“TP-LAN”) Jack, RJ-45 Connector (normal)
Pin. no: Function:1LD TPTX+ (Pos. Tx. data)2LD TPTX- (NEG. Tx. data)3LD TPRX+ (Pos. Rx. data)4LD Not Connected5LD Not Connected
6LD TPRX- (Neg. Rx. data)7LD Not Connected8LD Not Connected
Table X-8 10Base-T, 8-PIN Pinout
10Base-T / 100Base-TX Jack, RJ-45 Connector (uplink)
(Used only in Fast Ethernet configuration)
Pin. no: Function:1LD TPRX+ (Pos. Rx. data)2LD TPRX- (NEG. Rx. data)3LD TPTX+ (Pos. Tx. data)4LD Not Connected5LD Not Connected6LD TPTX- (Neg. Tx. data)7LD Not Connected8LD Not Connected
Table X-9 10Base-T / 100Base-TX, 8-PIN Pinout
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 365/374
B4008 Rev. M 365
Appendices
NI1 and NI2, Network Interface Connector Detail
PIN 1PIN 5
PIN 9 PIN 6
Figure X-9 “NI1” and “NI2” D-SUB 9 PIN Pinout
NI1 and NI2 D-SUB Signal Name Signal Description
9-PIN FEMALE
1 RxD- Data Input2 RxD+ Data Input3 GND Signal Ground.
Normally this pin shall
not be connected.4 TxD+ Data Output5 TxD- Data Output6 RxC- Clock Input7 RxC+ Clock Input8 TxC+ Clock Output9 TxC- Clock Output
Table X-10 “NI1” and “NI2” D-SUB 9-PIN Pinout
IDU to HSB Interface Connector
The connector is 68 pin VHDCI receptacle. This is a shielded connector
type and the screen is terminated to chassis ground.
Pos. 35
Pos. 1Pos. 34
Figure X-8 IDU to HSB-IDU Interface Connector
IN DOOR UNIT'SFRONT VIEW
IN DOOR UNIT'SFRONT VIEW
PIN 34 PIN 1
PIN 35
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 366/374
366 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
ALM & AUX Connector Detail
Figure X-10 “ALM & AUX” D-SUB 25-PIN Pinout
IDU
FRONT
VIEW
PIN 13 PIN 1
PIN 14PIN 25
ALM & AUX D-SUB Signal Name Signal Description
25-PIN FEMALE
1 USER1A Relay output 1A
2 USER1B Relay output 1B
3 USER2A Relay output 2A4 USER2B Relay output 2B
5 USER3A Relay output 3A
6 USER3B Relay output 3B
7 USER4A Relay output 4A
8 USER4B Relay output 4B
9 ALM1 Alarm input 1 (TTL level)
10 AGND Analog GND*
11 ALM2 Alarm input 2 (TTL level)
12 ALM3 Alarm input 3 (TTL level)13 AGND Analog GND*
14 AGND Analog GND*
15 ALM4 Alarm input 4 (TTL level)
16 AGND Analog GND*
17 ALM5 Alarm input 5 (relay input)
18 AGND Analog GND*
19 ALM6 Alarm input 6 (relay input)
20 ALM7 Alarm input 7 (relay input)
21 ALM8 Alarm input 8 (relay input)
22 ERRP_V11+ Error pulses (V.11 output)**
23 ERRP_V11- Error pulses (V.11 output)**
24 ERRP_OPEN_COL Error pulses
open collector output
25 ERRP_OPTO Error pulses opto
coupler driver output
Table X-11 “ALM & AUX” D-SUB 15-PIN Female Pinout
* Analog GND is floating relative scussi GND.
** Selectable from NEW-NMS: B1, B2 or Trellis decoder.
See Section VII Ch.4.4.5.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 367/374
B4008 Rev. M 367
Appendices
IDUFRONT
VIEW
PIN 5PIN 1
PIN 6 PIN 9
LCT Connector Detail
Figure X-11 “LCT” D-SUB 9 PIN male, Pinout
LCT D-SUB Signal Name Signal Description
9-PIN MALE
1 NC Not Connected
2 RxD City Link Data Input3 TxD City Link Data Output4 - Internally connected to pin 65 GND Signal ground6 - Internally connected to pin 47 - Internally connected to pin 88 - Internally connected to pin 79 NC Not connected
Table X-12 “LCT” D-SUB 9-PIN Pinout
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 368/374
368 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
1D
1A 6A
6D
Figure X-13 21x2Mbit/s Connector Detail
21x2Mbit/s Extension board G.703 Connector Details
Figures X-12 and X-13 shows the 4 connectors J1001 to J1004 and their
pinout. For location of the 4 connectors on the IDU; see Figur X-5.
For configuration of 21x 2.048 Mb/s input- and output- signals in connec-
tors and cables , see Table X-13.
Figure X-12 The 21x2 Mb/s interface connectors from left to right,
IDU front view.
J1001 J1002 J1003 J1004
IDUFRONTVIEW
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 369/374
B4008 Rev. M 369
Appendices
• Input, A / Output, A, refers to the positive pulse of the signal.
• Input, B / Output, B, refers to the negative pulse of the signal.
Connector J1001 Connector J1002 Connector J1003 Connector J1004Pin no
in
connec
-tor
Colour
code of
pairs in
cable2 Mb/s
Ch. No
Signal 2 Mb/s
Ch. No
Signal 2 Mb/s
Ch. No
Signal 2 Mb/s
Ch. No
Signal
1A Ch.1 Input, A Ch.7 Input, A Ch.13 Input, A Ch.19 Input, A
1B
White /
Blue Ch.1 Input, B Ch.7 Input, B Ch.13 Input, B Ch.19 Input, B
1C Ch.1 Output, A Ch.7 Output, A Ch.13 Output, A Ch.19 Output, A1D White /Orange Ch.1 Output, B Ch.7 Output, B Ch.13 Output, B Ch.19 Output, B
2A Ch.2 Input, A Ch.8 Input, A Ch.14 Input, A Ch.20 Input, A
2B
White /Green Ch.2 Input, B Ch.8 Input, B Ch.14 Input, B Ch.20 Input, B
2C Ch.2 Output, A Ch.8 Output, A Ch.14 Output, A Ch.20 Output, A
2D
White /Brown Ch.2 Output, B Ch.8 Output, B Ch.14 Output, B Ch.20 Output, B
3A Ch.3 Input, A Ch.9 Input, A Ch.15 Input, A Ch.21 Input, A
3B
Red /
Blue Ch.3 Input, B Ch.9 Input, B Ch.15 Input, B Ch.21 Input, B
3C Ch.3 Output, A Ch.9 Output, A Ch.15 Output, A Ch.21 Output, A
3D
Red /
Orange Ch.3 Output, B Ch.9 Output, B Ch.15 Output, B Ch.21 Output, B
4A Ch.4 Input, A Ch.10 Input, A Ch.16 Input, A N.c.
4B
Red /
Green Ch.4 Input, B Ch.10 Input, B Ch.16 Input, B N.c.4C Ch.4 Output, A Ch.10 Output, A Ch.16 Output, A N.c.
4D
Red /
Brown Ch.4 Output, B Ch.10 Output, B Ch.16 Output, B N.c.
5A Ch.5 Input, A Ch.11 Input, A Ch.17 Input, A N.c.
5B
Black /
Blue Ch.5 Input, B Ch.11 Input, B Ch.17 Input, B N.c.5C Ch.5 Output, A Ch.11 Output, A Ch.17 Output, A N.c.
5D
Black /
Orange Ch.5 Output, B Ch.11 Output, B Ch.17 Output, B N.c.
6A Ch.6 Input, A Ch.12 Input, A Ch.18 Input, A N.c.
6B
Black/
Green Ch.6 Input, B Ch.12 Input, B Ch.18 Input, B N.c.6C Ch.6 Output, A Ch.12 Output, A Ch.18 Output, A N.c.
6D
Black /
Brown Ch.6 Output, B Ch.12 Output, B Ch.18 Output, B N.c.
Table X-13 Configuration of 21x 2Mbit/s input- and output- signals in
connectors and cables
ADM STM-1 Extension Board Connectors
The type and configuration of connectors used for the 155 Mbit/s customer
line interface on the Extension Board are the same as used for the G.703 CMI
encoded 155 Mb/s customer line interface on the main board in the IDU.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 370/374
370 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Appendix II: ODU Interface Description
ODU/IDU Interface
N-connector female for: Transmit and Receive IF,
Modem/Transceiver communication and power supply.
Branching / Antenna Interface
PBR320 waveguide (38GHz).
PBR220 waveguide (18GHz, 23GHz and 26GHz).
PDR120 waveguide (for 13GHz).
PBR140 waveguide (for 15GHz).
PDR84 waveguide (for 7GHz and 8GHz).
Grounding cable for Branching Unit.
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 371/374
B4008 Rev. M 371
Appendices
Appendix III:Alarm List & Alarm Description
Alarm Name Description Id Severity
BASEBAND
LOS Loss Of Signal:- Optical or electrical CMI
1000 MAJOR
LOF Loss of Frame 1001 MAJOR
MS-AIS Alarm indication signal detected.MS termination only
1002 WARNING
MS-AIS-INS Alarm indication signal is inserted. 1003 MAJOR
MS-RDI Remote defect indicator detected.MS termination only
1004 WARNING
2M-WAYSIDE-INP 2Mbit wayside input is missing. 1005 MINOR
2M-WAYSIDE-AIS-INP 2Mbit wayside input AIS detected. 1006 WARNING
TRELLIS-PLL Indicates that the Trellis coder is out of lock.(CNF35CAsic)
1007 CRITICAL
RT-PLL The Sorp 38,88 MHz PLL is out of lock. 1008 CRITICAL
2M-SYNC Selected synchronisation for Line Transmit direction ismissing.
1009 MINOR
RS-TRACE-MISMATCH Mismatch between configured string and received string 1010 MAJOR
LOC Loss of clock (SORP) 1011 CRITICAL
BASEBANDDIRECTION RADIO TO LINE
LT-PLL The Line Transmit 155MHz PLL is out of lock. 1100 CRITICAL
2M-WAYSIDE-OUTP-AIS AIS is detected on the Wayside traffic output. 1101 WARNING
HBER Indicator for BER > 1e-3 1102 MAJOR
LBER Indicator for BER > 1e-6 1103 MINOR
EW-BER Indicator for BER > 1e-10 1104 WARNING
RF-ID Wrong RF-ID received compared to configuration. 1105 MAJOR
MODULATOR
IF-MOD Loss of IF 350MHz 1200 CRITICAL
DEMODULATOR
IF-DEM Loss of INCOMING 140MHz. 1300 CRITICAL
OPTICAL INTERFACE
TX-OUT The output power has increased 2dB, or the analogemeasurement of PO_MON is outside predefined limits
1400 CRITICAL
LASER-OFF The laser is off. It could be manual shutdown 1401 WARNINGBIAS The laser bias is out of limits. Sign of age and degradation 1402 WARNING
TRANSCEIVER
IF-INP No IF into transceiver 1500 CRITICAL
RF-OUT The output power is low 1501 MAJOR
LOS-RF-INPUT No signal into receiver. 1502 MAJOR
RF-INPUT-WARNING The RF level is either above the upward fading thresholdor The RF level is below the down fading threshold.
1504 WARNING
LO Local Oscillator is out of lock. 1505 MAJOR
UNIT-ALM The transceiver is not responding 1506 MAJOR
ATPC The regulation loop for the ATPC is not working. Softwaregenerated alarm based on alarm condition on local LOFon Rx and remote LOF on Rx .
1507 MINOR
RF-MUTE The RF transmitter is muted. 1508 WARNING
LOOPING-IF-EN The transceiver looping on IF is enabled 1509 WARNING
LOOPING-RF-EN The transceiver on RF is enabled.(If near-end and far end depends on the node wherealarm is reported)
1510 WARNING
MISSING_LO_SYNCHRONIZATION XPIC LO synch missing 1511 CRITICAL
LO-TUNING-WARNING The LO needs to be tuned 1512 WARNING
HIGH_TEMP_POWER_TRANSISTOR 1513 WARNING
RF_RX_LOW 1514 MAJOR
RF_RX_HIGH 1515 MAJOR
NO_CALIBRATION_DATA No calibration data 1516 MAJOR
HSB_CABLE_BREAK The cable between the ODUs is broken. This will causethe switch to perform the TX-switching.
1517 MAJOR
RF_TX_LOW 1518 MAJOR
RF_TX_HIGH 1519 MAJOR
IF_TX_LOW 1520 MAJOR
IF_TX_HIGH 1521 MAJOR
POWER_15 1522 WARNING
POWER_NEG15 1523 WARNING
POWER_6 1524 WARNING
POWER_48 1525 WARNING
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 372/374
372 B4008 Rev. M
CityLink
Alarm Name Description Id Severity
SYNTH_HEADER 1526 MAJOR
SHF_LO 1527 MAJOR
UHF_TX_LO 1528 MAJOR
UHF_RX_LO 1529 MAJOR
DUPLEX_LO 1530 MAJOR
VHF_LO 1531 MAJOR
TX_SWITCH_MAN 1532 WARNING
OTHER ALM
MEN-AT-WORK Software generated. Operator set men at work beforedoing repairs.
2000 WARNING
DROP-IN+48V The battery supply voltage is dropped below acceptablelimit
2001 WARNING
BELOW+3.3V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit 2002 WARNING
BELOW+5V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit 2003 WARNING
BELOW-5V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit 2005 WARNING
OVER-CURRENT Detects short current on ODU cable. 2006 MAJOR
WAYSIDE-LOOP FE Wayside looping Far End 2007 WARNING
WAYSIDE-LOOP NE Wayside looping Near End 2008 WARNING
PRBS-INSERTED PRBS inserted in wayside 2009 WARNING
LOOPING_EN Looping enabled 2010 WARNING
EVENT-LOG-EXC-LIMIT Event log has exceeded the capacity threshold 2011 WARNING
DOWNLOAD-IN-PROGRESS Download of software is under progress. 2012 WARNING
NEED_FREQUENCY A RF unit need to be configured with Tx and Rxfrequency.
2013 MAJOR
SECURITY-LOG-EXC-LIMIT Security log has exceeded the capacity threshold 2014 WARNING
64K-LOOPING-1 64 kb channel looping Channel1 2015 WARNING
64K-LOOPING-2 64 kb channel looping Channel2 2016 WARNING
RTC-LOW BATTERY The battery that powers the Real Time clock is low 2017 WARNING/ MINOR on
NL2000
BELOW+48V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit 2020 WARNING
BELOW+11V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit 2022 WARNING
BELOW+15V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit 2023 WARNING
BELOW-15V Voltage from the DC-DC converter below limit 2024 WARNING
MISSING-CALIBRATION-DATA Modem or transceiver are missing their calibration data in
flash
2032 MAJOR
FAN-ALARM 2034 WARNING
DEFAULT_SYSTEM_PARAMETERS No system configuration stored in NV config, using default(stm1,128TCM,28kHz)
2035 CRITICAL
DEFAULT_ANALOGE_PARAMETERS No analoge configuration stored in flash, using predefineddefaults.
2036 MAJOR
FAN2-ALARM 2037 WARNING
HSB-RELAY IDUswitch/Transceiver relay mismatch 2200 CRITICAL
IDUA-ACTIVE Idu A is active in receiving direction 2201 INFO
IDUB-ACTIVE Idu B is active in receiving direction 2202 INFO
HSB-MANUAL The iduswitch is operated manually 2203 WARNING
CHANNEL-ACTIVE This ODU is active 2216 INFO
NEED-SW Board needs SW 2221 MAJOR
BOOT-MONITOR-IN-USE The transceiver is in boot monitor mode 2224 WARNINGBOOT-HW-ERROR-DETECTED Errors detected by boot code when startup. Reported toapp. code
2225 MINOR
IDU_A_NEEDS_SW Reported from the IDU A 2226 WARNING
IDU_B_NEEDS_SW Reported from IDU B 2227 WARNING
HDLC_LOC_A The IDU switch has no RX-clock on port A 2228 MAJOR
HDLC_LOC_B The IDU switch has no RX-clock on port B 2229 MAJOR
HDLC_LOC The IDU(either A or B) has no RX-clock 2230 MAJOR
DROP-IN-48V-A The IDU switch power source 1 has a drop 2231 MAJOR
DROP-IN-48V-B The IDU switch power source 2 has a drop 2232 MAJOR
AUXILIARY ALARMS
EXTERN-ALARM-1 Multipurpose port. Configured asAlarm Output, Alarm Input or Remote Control.External alarm reported if port configured as alarm input.Alarm name configurable from management system.
2500 WARNING
EXTERN-ALARM-2 ref External alarm 1 2501 WARNING
EXTERN-ALARM-3 ref External alarm 1 2502 WARNING
EXTERN-ALARM-4 ref External alarm 1 2503 WARNING
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 373/374
B4008 Rev. M 373
Appendices
Alarm Name Description Id Severity
EXTERN-ALARM-5 ref External alarm 1 2504 WARNING
EXTERN-ALARM-6 ref External alarm 1 2505 WARNING
EXTERN-ALARM-7 ref External alarm 1 2506 WARNING
EXTERN-ALARM-8 ref External alarm 1 2507 WARNING
OUTPUT-ALARM-1 Output alarm reported if auxilary output port configured asalarm output.
2550 INFO
OUTPUT-ALARM-2 ref Output alarm 1 2551 INFO
OUTPUT-ALARM-3 ref Output alarm 1 2552 INFO
OUTPUT-ALARM-4 ref Output alarm 1 2553 INFO
SEVERITY ALARMS For alarm output function
CRITICAL-ALARM If any alarms with severity set to critical, this alarm israised. This can be combined in the alarm outputexpression.
2600 NA
MAJOR-ALARM If any alarms with severity set to major, this alarm israised. This can be combined in the alarm outputexpression.
2601 NA
MINOR-ALARM If any alarms with severity set to minor, this alarm israised. This can be combined in the alarm outputexpression.
2602 NA
WARNING-ALARM If any alarms with severity set to warning, this alarm israised. This can be combined in the alarm output
expression.
2603 NA
PERFORMANCE ALARMS All software generated
G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B1 If the current 15 minute period exceeds the set thresholdfor B1, this alarm is set(period 1). After a whole period hasexpired without exceeding the alarm threshold(period 2),the alarm will be cleared when the next periodstarts(period 3).
3000 WARNING
G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B2 If the current 15 minute period exceeds the set thresholdfor B2, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B1 for method of clearing. Only for MS termination.
3001 WARNING
G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-REI If the current 15 minute period exceeds the set thresholdfor REI, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B1 for method of clearing. Only for MS termination.
3002 WARNING
G826-THRESHOLD-24Hour-B1 If the current 24 hour period exceeds the set threshold forB1, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B1
for method of clearing.
3003 WARNING
G826-THRESHOLD-24HOUR-B2 If the current 24 hour period exceeds the set threshold forB2, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B1for method of clearing. Only for MS termination.
3004 WARNING
G826-THRESHOLD-24HOUR-REI If the current 24 hour period exceeds the set threshold forREI, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B1 for method of clearing. Only for MS termination.
3005 WARNING
G826-THRESHOLD-MONTH-B1 If the current month period exceeds the set threshold formonth, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B1 for method of clearing.
3006 WARNING
G826-THRESHOLD-MONTH_B2 If the current month period exceeds the set threshold formonth, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B1 for method of clearing. Only for MS termination.
3007 WARNING
G826-THRESHOLD-MONTH-REI If the current month period exceeds the set threshold forREI, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B1
for method of clearing. Only for MS termination.
3008 WARNING
TRESHOLD-15MIN-OOF If the current 15 minute period exceeds the set thresholdfor OOF, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B1 for method of clearing.
3015 WARNING
TRESHOLD-24HOUR-OOF If the current 24 hour period exceeds the set threshold forOOF, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B1 for method of clearing.
3016 WARNING
TRESHOLD-MONTH-OOF If the current month period exceeds the set threshold formonth, this alarm is set. Ref. G826-THRESHOLD-15MIN-B1 for method of clearing.
3017 WARNING
HIGHER ORDER POH ALARMS Description
HP-RDI Higher order Path Remote Defect Indicator 5050 WARNING
HP-TIM Higher order Path Trace Identifier Mismatch 5054 MAJOR
7/21/2019 NERA CityLink - User Manual_2.pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/nera-citylink-user-manual2pdf 374/374
CityLink
Fast Ethernet AlarmsAlarm Name Description Id Severity
FTP_USER_LOGGED_IN FTP user logged in 32768 NORMALILLEGAL_DATE_OR_TIME Illegal Date or Time 32770 WARNINGIDU_TEMPERATURE1_HIGH SU Temperature 1 (CPU) exceeded high
limitWARNING32771
IDU_TEMPERATURE2_HIGH SU Temperature 2 (DC/DC) exceeded high limit 32772 WARNINGFAN1_MANUAL_STOP SU Fan 1 is set in manual stop 32773 WARNINGFAN2_MANUAL_STOP SU Fan 2 is set in manual stop 32774 WARNING
FAN1_NOT_RUNNING SU Fan 1 is not running 32775 MAJORFAN2_NOT_RUNNING SU Fan 2 is not running 32776 MAJORI2C_BUS_FAILURE SU internal problem at I2C bus 32777 WARNINGBASEBAND_DEVICE_INIT_FAILURE There was a hardware error in the baseband module
during startup of the IDU32778 MAJOR
MODEM_DEVICE_INIT_FAILURE There was a hardware error in the modem moduleduring startup of the IDU
32779 MAJOR
EEB_DEVICE_INIT_FAILURE There was a hardware error in the ethernet extensionboard module during startup of the IDU
32780 MAJOR
COMMAND_LINE_INIT_FAILURE There was a hardware error in the command lineinterface module during startup of the IDU
32781 WARNING
CONSOLE_USER_LOGGED_IN A user is currently using the command-line interfaceshell on the IDU via the LCT port
32782 NORMAL
TELNET_USER_LOGGED_IN A user is currently using the command-l ine interfaceshell on the IDU via the telnet
32783 NORMAL
ETHERNET_PORT_1 EEB Port 1 link lost. 32784 NORMALETHERNET_PORT_2 EEB Port 2 link lost. 32785 NORMALETHERNET_PORT_3 EEB Port 3 link lost. 32786 NORMALETHERNET_PORT_4 EEB Port 4 link lost. 32787 NORMALLOS_2MBIT_PORT_1 EEB LOS port 1. 32788 NORMALLOS_2MBIT_PORT_2 EEB LOS port 2. 32789 NORMALLOS_2MBIT_PORT_3 EEB LOS port 3. 32790 NORMALLOS_2MBIT_PORT_4 EEB LOS port 4. 32791 NORMAL AIS_INPUT_2MBIT_PORT_1 EEB AIS input port 1. 32792 WARNING AIS_INPUT_2MBIT_PORT_2 EEB AIS input port 2. 32793 WARNING AIS_INPUT_2MBIT_PORT_3 EEB AIS input port 3. 32794 WARNING AIS_INPUT_2MBIT_PORT_4 EEB AIS input port 4. 32795 WARNING AIS_OUTPUT_2MBIT_PORT_1 EEB AIS output port 1. 32796 WARNING AIS_OUTPUT_2MBIT_PORT_2 EEB AIS output port 2. 32797 WARNING AIS_OUTPUT_2MBIT_PORT_3 EEB AIS output port 3. 32798 WARNING
AIS_OUTPUT_2MBIT_PORT_4 EEB AIS output port 4. 32799 WARNING AIS_INSERT_2MBIT_PORT_1_RX EEB AIS insert port 1 input. 32800 WARNING AIS_INSERT_2MBIT_PORT_2_RX EEB AIS insert port 2 input. 32801 WARNING AIS_INSERT_2MBIT_PORT_3_RX EEB AIS insert port 3 input. 32802 WARNING AIS_INSERT_2MBIT_PORT_4_RX EEB AIS insert port 4 input. 32803 WARNINGLOC_RT Loss of clock in the RT module of the baseband unit
(SORP)32804 CRITICAL
LOC_RR Loss of clock in the RR module of the baseband unit(SORP)
32805 CRITICAL
LOC_LT Loss of clock in the LT module of the baseband unit(SORP)
32806 CRITICAL
LOC_LR Loss of clock in the LR module of the baseband unit(SORP)
32807 CRITICAL
LOS_RR Loss of signal on radio receive (RR) 32808 MAJORLOF_RR Loss of frame on radio receive (RR) 32809 MAJORMS-AIS_RR Alarm indication signal detected on radio receive (RR) 32810 WARNINGMS-AIS_INSERT_RR Alarm indication signal is inserted on radio receive (RR) 32811 MAJORMS-RDI_RR Remote defect indicator detected on radio receive (RR) 32812 WARNINGLOS_LR Loss of signal on line receive (LR): - optical or electrical
CMI.32813 MAJOR
LOF_LR Loss of frame on line receive (LR) 32814 MAJORMS-AIS_LR Alarm indication signal detected on line receive (LR) 32815 WARNINGMS-AIS_INSERT_LR Alarm indication signal is inserted on line receive (LR) 32816 WARNINGMS-RDI_LR Remote defect indicator detected on line receive (LR) 32817 WARNINGMS-AIS_INSERT_RT Alarm indication signal is inserted on radio transmit
(RT)32818 MAJOR
MS-AIS_INSERT_LT Alarm indication signal is inserted on line transmit (LT) 32819 MAJORRS-TRACE-MISMATCH RR Mismatch between configured string and received string 32820 MAJOR